Engine TGM D0836

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 452

Common-rail In-line Engines

D0836 LFL50 - LFL55


D0836 LFL60
D0836 LFL63

Copy deadline: 12.2009

Repair Manual
81.99298-6212 3rd edition A25 Stage 2
MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft Reparaturanleitung A25 Stufe 2, 3. Ausgabe
Dachauer Str. 667 Reihenmotor Common Rail
80995 MÜNCHEN D0836 LFL50 - LFL55
oder D0836 LFL60
Postfach 50 06 20 D0836 LFL63
80995 MÜNCHEN - Englisch -
Printed in Germany
Repair Manual A25 Stage 2
3rd edition

Common-rail In-line Engines


D0836 LFL50 - LFL55
D0836 LFL60
D0836 LFL63

81.99298-6212

1
PREFACE / PRINTER’S IMPRINT

PREFACE

This manual provides assistance in performing repairs correctly on vehicles and units and reects the known
technical situation appertaining at the copy deadline.

This publication assumes that persons who use it possess the requisite technical knowledge in repairing
vehicles and units.

Pictures and the corresponding descriptions are typical one-time representations; they do not always
correspond to the unit to be repaired or its peripherals.

The repair work is split up into sections and subsections. Each subsection starts with a page of jobs to do
in advance. The jobs to do in advance contain a summary of the main prerequisites for the repair section in
question. The detailed description of work can follow the jobs to do in advance. Only the tightening torques
for screw/bolt connections which deviate from the standard are indicated in the repair sections.

Important instructions relating to safety and accident prevention are specially highlighted in the text as follows.
CAUTION
Type and source of danger
• Refers to working and operating procedures which must be followed exactly in order to avoid
exposing people to risk.
WARNING
Type and source of danger
• Refers to working and operating procedures which must be followed exactly in order to avoid
serious or irreparable damage to property.
Note
Explanatory description to aid understanding of the working and operating procedures involved.

Comply with general safety regulations when performing any repair work.

We reserve the right to make modications in the course of further development

Best wishes from

MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG

PRINTER’S IMPRINT

© 2009 MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG

Reprinting, copying or translation, even of extracts, is not allowed without the written approval of MAN. All
rights under the copyright law are strictly reserved by MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG. If any changes or modications
are made without the written approval of MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG then MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG shall not be
liable for any material defects attributable to the unauthorised changes or modications. MAN Nutzfahrzeuge
AG is not liable for any damage attributable to unauthorised changes or modications.

Redaktion: SAWDT, 2W Technische Informations GmbH/12.2009

Satz: SAWDT, 2W Technische Informations GmbH

Druck: MAN-Werksdruckerei

2 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Content Chapter/Page

Index 7

Introduction

Safety instructions ........................................................................................................ 9


The engine ................................................................................................................ 16
Model plate/model designation .................................................................................... 16
Characteristic data .................................................................................................. 18
Engine description ................................................................................................... 22

Engine electrics

Wiring harness ........................................................................................................... 29


Removing and installing the wiring harness .................................................................... 29
Engine electrics .......................................................................................................... 41
Removing and installing the engine electrics ................................................................... 41

Cooling system

Fan ......................................................................................................................... 45
Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704) ........................................................... 45
Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725) ........................................................... 49
Coolant manifold ......................................................................................................... 53
Removing and installing the coolant manifold .................................................................. 53
Thermostat with thermostat housing ................................................................................. 57
Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing .......................................... 57
Coolant pump ............................................................................................................ 61
Removing and installing the coolant pump ..................................................................... 61
Dismantling and assembling the coolant pump ................................................................ 65

Mounted components

Power take-off ............................................................................................................ 73


Removing and installing the power take-off .................................................................... 73
Air compressor ........................................................................................................... 77
Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor ....................................................... 77
Belt drive .................................................................................................................. 81
Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump) .... 81
Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive ................................................ 86
Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive ....................................................... 89
Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller) ...................... 93
Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with two guide rollers) ..................... 98
Checking and setting the refrigerant compressor belt track (D0836 LFL50 to LFL55) ................ 103
Alternator ................................................................................................................ 107
Removing and installing the alternator ........................................................................ 107
Grosskopf alternator .................................................................................................. 115
Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator ........................................................... 115
Starter ................................................................................................................... 119
Removing and installing the starter ............................................................................ 119
Refrigerant compressor .............................................................................................. 123
Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor ........................................................ 123
Hydraulic pump ........................................................................................................ 127
Removing and installing the hydraulic pump ................................................................. 127

Common-rail system

Injectors and rail ....................................................................................................... 135


Protective sleeves, injectors and rail ........................................................................... 135

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 3


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Removing and installing the injectors and rail ................................................................ 139


High-pressure pump .................................................................................................. 153
Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3) .................................................. 153
Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3) ....................................... 155
Dismantling and assembling the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3) .................................. 163
Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH) .............................................. 167
Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH) ................................... 169
Fuel service centre .................................................................................................... 177
Protective sleeves, fuel service centre ........................................................................ 177
Removing and installing the fuel service centre ............................................................. 180
Dismantling and assembling the fuel service centre ........................................................ 188
Flame start system .................................................................................................... 193
Protective sleeves, ame start system ........................................................................ 193
Removing and installing the ame start system ............................................................. 195
Engine control unit .................................................................................................... 199
Removing and installing the engine control unit ............................................................. 199

Turbocharging

Intercooler ............................................................................................................... 205


Removing and installing the intercooler ....................................................................... 205
Charge-air pipes/charge-air manifold .............................................................................. 207
Removing and installing the charge-air pipes/charge-air manifold (Euro 5 and EEV variant) ....... 207
Turbocharger ........................................................................................................... 213
Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging) ........................ 213
Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler) ... 218
Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging with intercooler) ....... 229

Intake / exhaust system

Air distributor pipe ..................................................................................................... 243


Removing and installing the air distributor pipe .............................................................. 243
EGR module ............................................................................................................ 249
Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant) ................................................ 249
Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 5 and EEV variant) .................................... 256
Exhaust manifold ...................................................................................................... 267
Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant) ........................................... 267
Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 5 and EEV variant) ............................... 271

Cylinder head

Rocker arm mechanism .............................................................................................. 277


Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism ........................................................ 277
Dismantling and assembling the rocker arm mechanism .................................................. 280
Cylinder head .......................................................................................................... 285
Removing and installing the cylinder head .................................................................... 285
Checking and setting the valve clearance .................................................................... 292
Removing and installing the valve stem seals ............................................................... 298

Valve timing

Camshaft / camshaft bearings ...................................................................................... 311


Removing and installing the camshaft/camshaft bearings ................................................. 311

Timing gears

Timing gears ............................................................................................................ 323


Removing and installing the timing gears ..................................................................... 323

4 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Engine lubrication

Oil module .............................................................................................................. 333


Removing and installing the oil module ....................................................................... 333
Oil sump and oil intake pipe ......................................................................................... 339
Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant) .............................. 339
Removing and installing the oil sump lower section (Euro 5 and EEV variant) ........................ 344
Removing and installing the oil sump upper section (Euro 5 and EEV variant) ........................ 347
Oil pump ................................................................................................................. 351
Removing and installing the oil pump .......................................................................... 351
Oil injector nozzles .................................................................................................... 355
Removing and installing the oil injector nozzles ............................................................. 355

Crank mechanism

Vibration damper ...................................................................................................... 361


Removing and installing the vibration damper ............................................................... 361
Flywheel for manual gearbox ....................................................................................... 365
Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox ................................................. 365
Pistons and connecting rods ........................................................................................ 375
Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods ................................................. 375
Crankshaft .............................................................................................................. 387
Removing and installing the crankshaft ....................................................................... 387

Crankshaft oil seals

Crankshaft oil seals ................................................................................................... 399


Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal ....................................................... 399
Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal ........................................................ 403

Engine housing

Crankcase ventilation ................................................................................................. 409


Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53) .................................. 409
Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55) .......................... 411
Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63) .................................. 413
Flywheel housing ...................................................................................................... 415
Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant without power take-off) ........................ 415
Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 300 Nm) ................. 418
Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 600 Nm) ................. 423
Crankcase yoke ........................................................................................................ 427
Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55) ......................................... 427
Timing case cover/timing case ...................................................................................... 431
Removing and installing the timing case cover .............................................................. 431
Removing and installing the timing case ...................................................................... 435

Power take-off

Power take-off .......................................................................................................... 441


Removing and installing the power take-off .................................................................. 441

Technical Data

Technical Data 443

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 5


INDEX

Catchword Page

A
Add-on units
Starter..................................................................................................................................................... 121
Air distributor pipe
Charge-air manifold................................................................................................................................ 259
Temperature sensor ............................................................................................................................... 246
Alternator
Coolant lines........................................................................................................................................... 110
Holder..................................................................................................................................................... 110
Support................................................................................................................................................... 111

B
Belt drive
Alternator poly-V-belt tensioner ................................................................................................................ 83
Grosskopf alternator guide roller .............................................................................................................. 87
Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt tensioner ............................................................................................... 87

C
Characteristic data......................................................................................................................................... 18
Crank mechanism
Connecting rod bearing .......................................................................................................................... 382
Connecting rod bearing cap ................................................................................................................... 380
Piston pin................................................................................................................................................ 380
Piston pin bushing .................................................................................................................................. 382
piston ring gap........................................................................................................................................ 381
Piston rings............................................................................................................................................. 381
Thrust washers....................................................................................................................................... 394
Vibration damper .................................................................................................................................... 363
Crankcase
Crankshaft oil seal front.......................................................................................................................... 402
Oil ller neck........................................................................................................................................... 433
Crankshaft oil seals
Rear crankshaft oil seal.......................................................................................................................... 406

E
EGR positioning cylinder
Setting the positioning cylinder............................................................................................................... 265
Engine description ......................................................................................................................................... 22
Engine lubrication
Oil cooler ................................................................................................................................................ 336
Oil lter ................................................................................................................................................... 335
Oil injector nozzles ................................................................................................................................. 357
Oil pressure switch ................................................................................................................................. 336

F
Flywheel
Circlip ..................................................................................................................................................... 372
Clutch pilot bearing................................................................................................................................. 372
Flywheel ring gear .................................................................................................................................. 370
Flywheel housing
crankshaft gear....................................................................................................................................... 424
Intermediate gear ................................................................................................................................... 425
Fuel service centre
Hand pump............................................................................................................................................. 191
Heating element ..................................................................................................................................... 190
Pressure sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 190

G
Grosskopf alternator
Holder..................................................................................................................................................... 117

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 7


INDEX

H
Hydraulic pump
Support................................................................................................................................................... 129
V-belt pulley............................................................................................................................................ 129

I
Intercooler, low-pressure side
Absorber mat.......................................................................................................................................... 206
Charge-air manifold unscrewed conduits ............................................................................................... 206

M
Model plate .................................................................................................................................................... 16

O
Oil module
Draining the coolant ............................................................................................................................... 336

P
Power take-off
Poly-V-belt pulley...................................................................................................................................... 74

R
Refrigerant compressor
Bracket ................................................................................................................................................... 125
Holder..................................................................................................................................................... 125

S
Safety instructions ........................................................................................................................................... 9
General....................................................................................................................................................... 9

T
Turbocharger
Charge-air manifold................................................................................................................................ 220
Oil pressure line ..................................................................................................................................... 233
Oil return line .......................................................................................................................................... 222
Pulse valve ............................................................................................................................................. 223

V
Valve timing
Camshaft ................................................................................................................................................ 315
Camshaft bearing 1 ................................................................................................................................ 316
Camshaft bearing 5 ................................................................................................................................ 317
Camshaft bearings 2 - 4 ......................................................................................................................... 316
Flange .................................................................................................................................................... 315
Tappet..................................................................................................................................................... 315

8 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

General
Only trained personnel are allowed to perform operating, maintenance and repair work on trucks, buses and
coaches.

The following sections include summaries of important regulations, listed according to major topics, which
must be complied with. The intention is to provide the knowledge needed to avoid accidents which could
lead to injury, damage and environmental pollution. Please note that these are merely brief extracts taken
from various accident prevention regulations. Of course, all other safety regulations must be followed and
the necessary measures must be taken.

Additional references to danger are contained in the instructions at points where there is a potential danger.

Accidents may happen in spite of all precautionary measures having been taken. In such an eventuality,
obtain immediate medical assistance from a doctor. This is particularly important if the accident involves skin
contact with corrosive acid, fuel penetration under the skin, scalding by hot oil, antifreeze spraying into eyes,
crushing of limbs etc.

1. Regulations for preventing accidents leading to injury to personnel

Checking, setting and repair work


– Secure units during their removal.
– Support the frame when working on the pneumatic or spring suspension system.
– Keep units, ladders, stairs, steps and the surrounding area free from oil and grease.
– Only use tools that are in perfect condition.
– Only authorised technical personnel are entitled to perform inspection, adjustment and repair work.

Working on the brake system


– A dust extractor must be used if dust is released when working on the brake system.
– Perform visual, function and effectiveness checks on the brake system after carrying out any work on it
whatsoever. These checks must be made in accordance with the safety inspection (SP).
– Check the function of ABS/ASR systems using a suitable test system (e.g. MAN-cats).
– Collect any brake uid that leaks out.
– Brake uid is poisonous! Do not allow it to come into contact with food or open wounds.
– Treat hydraulic uid/brake uid as hazardous waste!
Comply with the safety regulations for preventing environmental pollution.

Working on vehicles with compressed natural gas (CNG) system


– Vehicles with a defective compressed natural gas system may not be brought into the workshop. This also
applies to vehicles whose engine cannot be switched off by automatic emptying of the removal lines.
– When working on vehicles with a compressed natural gas system, set up a gas warning device above the
vehicle roof and in the engine compartment above the pressure controller. Further gas warning devices
must be carried by the persons working on the vehicle.
– Smoking is not allowed in areas where work on vehicles with compressed natural gas systems is carried
out. All sources of ignition must be removed from these areas.
– Before carrying out welding work, the compressed gas tanks must be removed and the gas-carrying lines
must be ushed with inert gas.
– Compressed gas tanks are only allowed to be exposed to temperatures up to 60° C in paint-drying booths.
If the temperatures are any higher, the compressed gas tanks must be removed or degassed using an inert
gas such as nitrogen. The gas-carrying lines must also be ushed with inert gas.

Working on the compressed natural gas (CNG) system


– Work on the compressed natural gas system may only be carried out by persons who have been specically
trained to do so.
– The working area for the compressed natural gas system must be equipped with an adequate ventilation
system. The ventilation system must replace the air in the room with new air at least three times per hour.
– After exchanging standard-t components of the compressed natural gas system using the prescribed
procedures, check the assembly points for leaks. Perform these checks using leak indicator spray or a gas
warning device.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 9


INTRODUCTION

Engine operation
– Only authorised personnel are permitted to start and operate an engine.
– Do not approach moving parts of a running engine too closely and do not wear baggy clothing. Use an
extractor system if working in enclosed spaces.
– Danger of burns when working on engines at operating temperature.
– Danger of scalding when opening the hot cooling circuit.

Suspended loads
– People are not allowed to stand below suspended loads.
– Only use suitable lifting and gear that is in perfect working order. Use lifting devices with sufcient
load-carrying capacity.

Attachments and special bodies


– Comply with the safety instructions and regulations issued by the body manufacturer in question if
attachments or special bodies are tted.

Working on high-pressure lines


– Do not attempt to tighten or loosen pipe lines and hoses when they are under pressure (e.g. lubrication
circuit, coolant circuit and hydraulic oil circuit).
Risk of injury due to pressurised uids emerging!

Checking injector nozzles


– Wear suitable protective equipment.
– Do not hold any part of your body under the jet of fuel when checking the injector nozzles.
– Do not inhale fuel vapours. Ensure that there is adequate ventilation.

Working on the vehicle electrical system


– Do not disconnect batteries whilst the engine is running!
– Always disconnect batteries when working on the vehicle electronic system, central electrical system,
alternator and starter! When disconnecting batteries, remove the negative terminals rst. When connecting
batteries, t the positive terminals rst.
– Always use suitable test lines and test adapters when measuring at plug connections!
– If temperatures of over 80°C are to be expected (e.g. in a drying oven after painting), switch the battery
master switch to "OFF" and then remove the control units.
– The chassis is not intended for use as an earth return. If attachments are to be tted to the vehicle (e.g.
a wheelchair lift), additional earth (ground) lines with an adequate cross-section must be tted as well.
Otherwise the earth connection may be created along wire cables, wiring harnesses, gearbox shafts, gears
etc. Severe damage could result.

Important! Battery gases are explosive!


– Oxyhydrogen gas may form in enclosed battery boxes. Take particular care after long journeys and after
charging the batteries with a battery charger.
– When the batteries are disconnected this gas may be ignited by sparks produced by other continuously
operating consumers, the tachograph etc. that cannot be shut down. Blow compressed air through the
battery box before disconnecting the batteries!
– Always leave the batteries connected when towing the vehicle! Only tow the vehicle if the check lamps are
still dimly lit but the battery starting power is not reached.
Do not use a rapid-charger to jump-start the vehicle!
– Always disconnect the positive and negative leads before charging and rapid-charging batteries!
– Do not rapid-charge lead-gel and maintenance-free batteries! (not in the case of "maintenance-free acc. to
DIN") The maximum charging capacity is 10% of the indicated capacity per battery. In parallel circuits, the
capacity is increased, in accordance with the total number of batteries connected in parallel.
– Risk of short-circuits due to incorrect battery polarity!
– Do not put metal objects (spanners, mole grips, etc.) on the batteries, since they may connect the terminals
together. Risk of short-circuit!
– Disconnect the batteries and recharge them every 4 weeks if the vehicle is not in use for prolonged periods.

Caution! Battery acid is poisonous and corrosive!


– Wear appropriate protective clothing (gloves) when handling batteries.
Do not tilt batteries, acid may leak out. Similarly, do not tilt gel batteries.
– Measure voltage only using suitable measurement devices! The input resistance of a measuring device
should be at least 10 MΩ.

10 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

– Only disconnect and connect plug connections for electronic control unit when the ignition is switched off!

Electric welding
– Connect the “ANTIZAP SERVICE SENTRY” protection device (MAN item number 80.78010.0002) as
described in the instructions accompanying the device.
– If this device is not available, disconnect the batteries and connect the positive cable to the negative cable
in order to make a rm conductive connection.
– If the battery master switch is manually operated, move it to the driving position. If an electronic battery
master switch is tted, bridge “Negative” at the load-disconnecting relay contacts (jumper cable > 1mm2)
and “Positive” at the load-disconnecting relay load contacts. In addition, switch on many loads such as:
starter switch (ignition) in driving position, hazard warning lights switch “on”, lighting switch in “driving lights
on”position, ventilation blower in “maximum” position. The greater number of consumers that are switched
on, the greater the protection.
After completing welding work, rst switch off all the consumers and remove all jumpers (re-create original
state), then connect the batteries.
– Always earth the welding equipment as close as possible to the welding area. Do not lay the cables to the
welding equipment in parallel to electrical cables in the vehicle.

Working on plastic tubes – Danger of damage and re!


– Mechanical or thermal loading of plastic tubes is not permitted.

Painting
– If paint spraying is to be carried out, do not expose the electronic components to high temperatures (max.
95 °C) for more than brief periods; a time of up to 2 hours is permissible at a maximum of 85 °C. Disconnect
the batteries.
Painting of screw connections in the high-pressure section of the injection system is not permitted. Risk of
dirt ingress in the event of repairs.

Working with the cab tilted forwards


– Keep the tilting area in front of the cab clear.
– Keep out of the area between the cab and the chassis during the tilting process. This is a danger area!
– Always tilt the cab past the tilting point and secure the cab using a support rod.

Working on the air-conditioning system


– Refrigerant uids and vapours represent a health hazard, avoid contact with them and protect your eyes
and hands.
– Do not drain gaseous refrigerants in enclosed rooms.
– Do not mix CFC-free refrigerant R 134a with R 12 (CFC) refrigerant.
– Dispose of refrigerant in accordance with regulations.

Working on airbag or belt tensioner units


– Work on airbag or belt tensioner units may only be carried out by staff who have veriably completed a
competence course at the MAN Service Academy.
– Mechanical loads, vibrations, heating to over 140° C and electrical pulses, including electrostatic discharge,
can cause unintentional ring of the airbag or belt tensioner units.
– Hot gases are released explosively when the airbag or belt tensioner unit is red. The non-mounted airbag
or belt tensioner unit can be tossed around uncontrollably. This poses an injury risk to people in or near the
cab.
– Risk of burns when touching the hot surfaces after the airbag has red.
– Do not open a red airbag.
– Do not touch a red, destroyed airbag with your bare hands. Wear nitrile rubber gloves.
– Before all work and testing on airbag or belt tensioner units or work on the vehicle that can cause vibrations,
switch off the ignition, remove the ignition key, disconnect the ground line from the battery and disconnect
the power supply plug connection for the airbag and belt tensioner.
– Mount the driver airbag restraint system, MAN part number 81.66900-6035, on the airbag steering wheel
in accordance with the operating instructions.
– Only use specially designated devices for testing airbag and belt tensioner units. Do not use test lamps,
voltmeters or ohmmeters.
– After all work and tests, rst switch off the ignition, then connect the plug connection(s) for airbag and belt
tensioner. Then connect the battery. There must be no-one in the cab whilst this work is going on.
– Always deposit the airbags individually and with the impact cushion upwards.
– Do not treat airbags or belt tensioners with grease or cleaners.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 11


INTRODUCTION

– Always store and transport airbag and belt tensioner units in their original packaging. Transport in the
passenger compartment is not permitted.
– Always store airbag and belt tensioner units in lockable storage areas, up to a maximum of 200 kg.

Working on the independent heater


– Before commencing work, switch off the heater and allow all hot components to cool down.
– Ensure that suitable collecting containers are available and no sources of ignition are present when working
on the fuel system.
– Keep suitable re extinguishing equipment nearby and within easy reach!!
– The heater may not be operated in enclosed areas such as garages or workshops unless an extractor
system is used.

2. Notes on preventing damage and premature wear on units

General information
– Units are only designed for their specied purpose - dened by the manufacturer (designated use): Any
other use is classied as not in accordance with the designated use. The manufacturer is not liable for
damage caused as a result of such other use. In the event of such other use, the user alone bears the risk.
– Designated use also includes compliance with the operating, maintenance and repair conditions specied
by the manufacturer.
– The unit may only be used, maintained and repaired by persons who are familiar with it and are fully aware
of the risks.
– Arbitrary changes to the engine mean that the manufacturer is no longer responsible for any damage
incurred as a result of such changes.
– Similarly, tampering with the injection and control system can affect the unit's performance and exhaust-gas
characteristics. This means that compliance with the statutory environmental requirements is no longer
assured.
– If malfunctions occur, determine the cause and remedy the problem immediately.
– Clean units thoroughly before repairs, ensuring that all openings where dirt is not allowed to enter for safety
or functioning reasons are closed.
– Never run a unit dry, in other words always make sure that it has been lled with oil before running it.
– Never run engines without coolant.
– Apply a suitable information sign to units that are not ready to be operated.
– Only use service products as per the MAN Recommended Service Products booklet, otherwise the
manufacturer warranty will be invalidated.
Details of approved products can be found online at: http://www.man-mn.com/ > Products & Solutions >
E-Business.
– Comply with the specied maintenance intervals.
– Do not ll engine/gear oil above the maximum level mark. Do not exceed the maximum permitted operational
tilt.
– The special measures described in MAN Works Standard M 3069 Part 3 apply if buses or trucks are to be
withdrawn from service or stored for a period longer than 3 months.

3. Limited liability for parts and accessories

General information
Only use accessories and genuine MAN parts that have been expressly approved by MAN Nutzfahrzeuge
AG for your MAN vehicle. MAN Nutzfahrzeuge AG accepts no liability for any other products.

4. Regulations for avoiding injury and environmental contamination

Health protection precautions


Avoid prolonged, excessive or repeated skin contact with service products, excipients, thinners or solvents.
Protect your skin using a suitable skin protection agent or protective gloves. Do not use service products,
excipients, thinners or solvents to clean the skin. Apply a greasy skin cream after cleaning your skin.

Service products and excipients


Do not use food or drink containers for draining and storing service products or excipients. Comply with
local-authority regulations when disposing of service products and excipients.

Coolant
Treat undiluted antifreeze as hazardous waste. Follow the instructions issued by the relevant local authority
when disposing of used coolant (mixture of antifreeze and water).

12 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

Cleaning the cooling circuit


Do not pour cleaning uids and rinsing water down the drain if this practice is restricted by specic local
regulations. However, the cleaning uid and rinsing water must in all cases have been passed through an oil
trap with a sludge trap.

Cleaning the lter insert


When blowing compressed air through the lter insert, make sure the lter dust is collected by a vacuum or
is blown into a dust collection bag. Otherwise, use a respiratory protection mask. Wear rubber gloves or
use a skin barrier hand cream when washing out the elements, because cleaning agents have aggressive
grease-dissolving characteristics.

Engine/gear oil, lter cartridges, inserts and box-type lters, desiccant cartridges
Filter inserts, cartridges and box-type lters (oil and fuel lters, desiccant cartridges for the air dryer) are
classied as hazardous waste. Comply with local-authority regulations when disposing of the above parts.

Used engine/gear oil


Lengthy or repeated skin contact with any type of engine/gear oil removes grease from the skin. This can
cause dry skin, irritation or skin inammation. In addition to these hazards, used engine oil contains dangerous
materials which can trigger dangerous skin diseases. Wear gloves, especially when changing the oil.

Handling AdBlue®
AdBlue® is a synthetically produced 32.5 % urea/water solution which is used as an NOx reduction additive
for diesel engines with SCR catalytic converter. AdBlue® is not a hazardous substance but does decompose
into ammonium hydroxide and carbon dioxide when stored for prolonged periods. For this reason, AdBlue®
is classied as a water hazard (water hazard class 1) in Germany and is not allowed to enter sewage or the
ground. Ensure good ventilation in the workplace when working on the AdBlue® system. Do not eat, drink
or smoke in the workplace. Avoid skin and eye contact with AdBlue®, thoroughly wash your hands and use
a skin protection cream before taking breaks and before nishing work. If your skin comes into contact with
AdBlue®, wash the skin using water and a skin cleaner, change out of dirty clothes immediately. If the skin
is irritated, consult a doctor. If AdBlue® gets into your eyes, rinse your eyes with water or an eye-rinsing
products for at least 10 minutes, keeping your eyelids open. Remove any contact lenses beforehand. If
symptoms persist, consult a doctor. If AdBlue® is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately. Store AdBlue®
containers closed in liquid-tight storage areas. The storage temperature must not exceed 25°C. Soak up
leaked or spilt AdBlue® using binding agent and dispose of in the correct manner.

5. Information for working on the common rail system

General information
– A jet of fuel can cut through the skin. Risk of re due to fuel atomisation.
– Never undo the screwed connections on the fuel high-pressure side of the common-rail system whilst the
engine is running (high-pressure line from the high-pressure pump to/on the rail and on the cylinder head
to the injector). Whilst the engine is running, the lines are constantly carrying fuel under a pressure of 1800
bar or more. Before the screw connections are opened, wait at least one minute until depressurisation has
occurred, using MAN-cats to check the depressurisation on the rail as necessary.
– Avoid standing near the running engine.
– Do not touch the live parts at the injector electrical connection whilst the engine is running.
– Any changes to the original wiring can lead to the limit values specied in pacemaker regulations being
exceeded. Examples of such changes include non-twisted injector wiring or the addition of the test box
(contact box).
– There is no danger to operators and persons wearing a pacemaker if units with MAN common-rail engines
are used for their intended, i.e. approved, purpose.
– A jet of fuel can cut through the skin. Risk of re due to fuel atomisation.
– Never undo the screwed connections on the fuel high-pressure side of the common-rail system whilst the
engine is running (injection line from the high-pressure pump to/on the rail and on the cylinder head to the
injector).
– Avoid standing near the running engine.
– Whilst the engine is running, the lines are constantly carrying fuel under a pressure of 1800 bar or more.
– Before opening the screwed connections, wait for at least one minute so that the system can be
depressurised.
– Check depressurisation of the rail using MAN-cats if necessary.
– Do not touch the live parts at the injector electrical connection whilst the engine is running.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 13


INTRODUCTION

Information for people with pacemakers


– Any changes to the original engine wiring can lead to the limit values specied in pacemaker regulations
being exceeded. Examples of such changes include non-twisted injector wiring or the addition of the test
box (contact box).
– There is no danger to drivers and co-drivers wearing a pacemaker if the vehicle is used for its intended, i.e.
approved, purpose.
– There is no danger to operators wearing a pacemaker if units with MAN common-rail engines are used for
their intended, i.e. approved, purpose.
– In its original state, the product does not violate any of the currently known pacemaker limit values.

Danger of damage due to dirt ingress


– Diesel-injection systems consist of precision engineered components that are subject to extreme loads; Due
to the highly precise nature of this technology, all work on the fuel system requires the highest possible
degree of cleanliness.
– Even dirt particles over 0.002 mm can cause component failure.

Before commencing work on the clean side


– Clean the engine and engine compartment with the fuel system closed. Do not use a powerful jet when
cleaning electrical components.
– Drive the vehicle into a clean area of the workshop where none of the work causes dust to be swirled up
(sanding, welding, brake repairs, brake checks, performance tests etc.).
– Avoid air movements (possible swirling up of dust due to starting of engines, the workshop
heating/ventilation system, due to draughts etc.).
– Clean and dry the area of the still closed fuel system using compressed air.
– Use a suitable extractor unit (industrial extractor unit) to remove loose dirt particles such as paint chippings
and insulating material.
– Use a new and clean cover in areas of the engine compartment where dirt particles can become loose, e.g.
tilted cab, bus engine compartment.
– Before removing any components, wash your hands and put on clean working clothes.

After opening the clean side


– The use of compressed air for cleaning is not permitted.
– During assembly, remove loose dirt using a suitable extractor unit (industrial extractor unit).
– Only lint-free cleaning cloths are allowed to be used on the fuel system.
– Clean tools and equipment before commencing work.
– Only use tools that show no signs of damage (cracked chrome coatings).
– Do not use materials such as cloths, cardboard or wood when removing and installing components as these
materials can produce particles and bres.
– If the undoing of connections causes the paint to chip (due to possible excess paint), carefully remove these
paint chippings before fully undoing the connection.
– All removed components on the clean side of the fuel system must be plugged immediately at their
connection openings using suitable caps.
– These caps must be stored in dustproof packaging until they are used and disposed of after they have been
used once.
– Then store the components in a clean, sealed container.
– Never use used cleaning or test uids for these components.
– New parts must not be removed from their original packaging until immediately before use.
– Work on removed components may only be carried out in a suitably equipped workplace.
– If removed parts are shipped, always use the new part's original packaging.
When carrying out work on bus engines, the instructions below must also be followed without fail:

Danger of damage due to dirt ingress


– Before opening the clean side of the fuel system:
Clean the areas of the engine around pressure line ttings, injection lines, the rail and valve cover using
compressed air.
– Remove the valve cover and then re-clean the areas of the engine around the pressure line ttings, injection
lines and rail.
– Only loosen rail connections at rst:
Undo the union nuts on the rail connections and unscrew by 4 turns.
Raise the rail connections using a special tool.
Reason: only remove the rail connections completely once the injectors have been removed so that no dirt
can fall into the injectors from above.

14 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

– Remove the injectors.


– After removal, rinse out the injectors with a cleaning uid, making sure that the high-pressure connection
hole is facing downwards.
– Remove the rail connections by unscrewing their union nuts.
– Clean the injector hole in the cylinder head.

6. Limp-home program for units with electronic control units

General information
The units have an electronic control system that monitors the unit as well as itself (self-diagnosis).

As soon as a malfunction occurs, the malfunction is evaluated and one of the following measures is
implemented automatically:

– Output of a fault message with fault code.


– Switchover to suitable default function for further operation, albeit with restrictions. Have malfunctions
remedied by MAN after-sales immediately.
– If MAN-cats is used, the fault code is output directly.

7. Installation instructions

Installation of piping
– Mechanical deformation of piping is not permitted when performing installation work - risk of fracture!

Installation of gaskets
– Only use genuine MAN gaskets
– Make sure the surfaces to be sealed are undamaged and clean.
– Do not use adhesives or sealing compounds. If necessary, to facilitate installation, use a little grease to
stick the gasket to the part to be mounted.
– Tighten the bolts evenly to the specied tightening torque.

Installation of O-rings
– Only use genuine MAN O-rings
– Make sure the surfaces to be sealed are undamaged and clean.

Engine overhaul
– A range of very different factors affect the engine service life. It is therefore not possible to indicate the
exact number of operating hours or miles before a major overhaul is due.
– In our judgement, it is not advisable to open an engine or perform a major overhaul if the engine has good
compression values and the following operating values have not changed signicantly since they were
measured and taken during the initial start-up:
– Charge pressure
– Exhaust gas temperature
– Coolant and lubricating oil temperature
– Oil pressure and oil consumption
– Smoke characteristics

The following criteria have a major inuence on the engine service life:
– Correct power setting for the application type
– Correct installation
– Approval of the installation by authorised personnel
– Regular maintenance as per the maintenance schedule

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 15


INTRODUCTION

THE ENGINE

Model plate/model designation

Explanation of the model plate

(1) Engine type (3) Engine serial number


(2) NI/NII reworking levels

Explanation of reworking levels


There are reworking levels for crankshaft bearings and connecting rod bearings as well as for pistons. The
reworking subassemblies are indicated on the type plate, e.g.:

P = crankshaft connecting rod bearing NI or NII

H = crankshaft - crankshaft bearing NI or NII

Explanation of the engine no. (Engine identication number)

Motor-Nr. / engine no. Classication terms (assignment)


218 Model number after model code
1440 Day of assembly
522 Assembly sequence (serial number on day of assembly)

1442 The last four digits of the engine no. (Motor-Nr.) are production- and
equipment-specic data.

Explanation of the model designation

Model Meaning Example


designation

D Fuel type Diesel


08 Identication number + 100 108 mm bore
3 (identication number x 10) + 100 130 mm stroke (rounded)
6 Number of cylinders 6-cylinder
L Turbocharging With turbocharger and intercooler

16 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

F Engine installation Engine/vertical/LHD forward-control vehicle


L Engine installation Light series
51 Type identication Output/rpm/approval

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 17


INTRODUCTION

Characteristic data

D0836 LFL50

Designation Unit of Data


measurement
Emissions category Euro 4
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 625
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation as viewed onto ywheel Left
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC in kW/hp 176/240
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 570
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 925 Nm at 1200-1800 rpm

D0836 LFL51

Designation Unit of Data


measurement
Emissions category Euro 4
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 642
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation as viewed onto ywheel Left
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC in kW/hp 206/280
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 570
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 1100 Nm at 1200-1750 rpm

D0836 LFL52

Designation Unit of Data


measurement
Emissions category Euro 4
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4

18 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

Engine weight, dry kg 642


Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation as viewed onto ywheel Left
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC in kW/hp 240/326
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 570
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 1250 Nm at 1200-1800 rpm

D0836 LFL53

Designation Unit of Data


measurement
Emissions category Euro 4
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 625
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation as viewed onto ywheel Left
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC in kW/hp 176/240
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 570
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 925 Nm at 1200-1800 rpm

D0836 LFL54

Designation Unit of Data


measurement
Emissions category Euro 4
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 642
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation as viewed onto ywheel Left
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC in kW/hp 206/280
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 19


INTRODUCTION

Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4


Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 570
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 1100 Nm at 1200-1750 rpm

D0836 LFL55

Designation Unit of Data


measurement
Emissions category Euro 4
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 642
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation as viewed onto ywheel Left
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC in kW/hp 240/326
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 570
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 1250 Nm at 1200-1800 rpm

D0836 LFL60

Designation Unit of Details


measurement
Emissions category EEV
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 679
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation when looking towards Left
ywheel
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC kW/hp 184/250
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 600
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 1000 Nm at 1200-1750 rpm

20 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

D0836 LFL63

Designation Unit of Details


measurement
Emissions category Euro 5
Number of cylinders/arrangement 6 cylinders/in-line/vertical
Valves per cylinder 4
Engine weight, dry kg 679
Injection system Common rail/EDC 7
Direction of rotation when looking towards Left
ywheel
Rated output to ISO 1585-89/491 EEC kW/hp 184/250
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Swept volume cc 6871
Firing sequence 1-5-3-6-2-4
Rated speed rpm 2300
Low idling speed rpm 600
Max. torque at engine speed Nm rpm 1000 Nm at 1200-1750 rpm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 21


INTRODUCTION

Engine description

Euro 4

(1) Charge-air manifold


(2) Coolant pump
(3) Coolant outlet pipe
(4) Alternator
(5) Air compressor
(6) Turbocharger
(7) EGR positioning cylinder
(8) Fuel service centre
(9) EGR module (exhaust gas recirculation)
(10) Air distributor pipe
(11) Engine control unit (EDC)
(12) Flywheel housing
(13) Starter
(14) Rail
(15) Crankcase yoke
(16) High-pressure pump
(17) Oil module
(18) Charge-air manifold
(19) Covering pan
(20) Vibration damper
(21) Refrigerant compressor
(22) Power take-off poly-V-belt pulley

22 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

Euro 5 and EEV

(1) Charge-air pipe (12) Flywheel housing


(2) Coolant pump (13) Starter
(3) Coolant manifold (14) Rail
(4) Alternator (15) Oil sump upper section
(5) Air compressor (16) High-pressure pump
(6) Turbocharger (17) Oil module
(7) EGR positioning cylinder (18) Charge-air manifold
(8) Fuel service centre (19) Oil sump
(9) EGR module (exhaust gas recirculation) (20) Vibration damper
(10) Air distributor pipe (21) Refrigerant compressor
(11) Engine control unit (EDC) (22) Poly-V-belt pulley

Engine, general
The engines described here are liquid-cooled, turbocharged 6-cylinder, 4-stroke diesel engines with
exhaust-gas turbocharger. They comply with the Euro 4, Euro 5 and EEV emissions standards.

The engines operate using the common-rail high-pressure injection system in conjunction with EDC 7
(Electronic Diesel Control).

Engine monitoring
Various sensors monitor the engine. The sensors are speed and temperature sensors, for example, which
send information about the various engine operating conditions and states to the engine control unit.

The engine control unit operates according to the IPO principle:

I = Input

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 23


INTRODUCTION

P = Processing

O = Output

The engine control unit processes the information received from the sensors and controls the output signals
which are sent to the actuators. The actuators convert the signals into mechanical variables. An actuator is,
for example, the proportioning unit on the high-pressure pump.

Crankcase
The crankcase and the cylinder block are a monoblock casting made from special cast iron. The pistons run
directly in the crankcase. Ceramic honing of the cylinder liner surfaces achieves optimal results with respect
to wear resistance and oil consumption. At the rear of the crankcase, there is a ywheel housing. At the
front of the crankcase, there is a timing case cover. The ywheel housing and timing case cover are made
of aluminium. The crankshaft oil seals are installed in the timing case cover and the ywheel housing. The
crankcase blow-by gases are returned to the combustion air via an oil separator with pressure-relief valve on
the suction side of the turbocharger.

Crankshaft
The crankshaft is forged in a die using high-quality, micro-alloyed steel. It has eight cast counterweights to
balance the masses. The crankshaft is mounted in seven bearings in the crankcase. The crankshaft journals
and crank pins are mounted in ready-to-install three-component bearings. They are axially mounted in thrust
washers inserted in the crankcase at the 4th bearing seat. The connecting rod bearings are supplied with oil
via a bore in the crankshaft bearing.

Connecting rods ("cracked" connecting rods)


The "cracked" connecting rods are precision forged in a die using quenched and tempered steel. The large
connecting rod eye is split diagonally by "cracking" the connecting rod bearing cap. The surface structure
resulting from cracking results in a tooth engagement effect between the connecting rod bearing cap and the
connecting rod with a precise, non-interchangeable t and high lateral stability.

Pistons
3-ring pistons made of special die-cast aluminium are used. They feature a cast ring carrier for the uppermost
piston ring. The pistons have a cast-in cooling duct for reducing the thermal load when the output is high.
They are cooled by an oil jet from the oil injector nozzles. The ring set comprises one taper-face ring and
one full keystone ring, each as compression rings, as well as one double-bevelled slotted oil control ring with
spiral-type expander as an oil scraper ring.

Cylinder head
D08 series engines are equipped with a single-section cylinder head. The cylinder head is made from special
cast iron and is tted with shrink-tted valve seat rings and pressed-in, exchangeable valve guides. The valve
guides have valve stem seals at all four valves. The valves are actuated by individually exchangeable rocker
arms on rocker shafts. The cylinder head is secured with high-strength external hexagon round screws
(cylinder head bolts). The single-layer steel cylinder head gasket has a specially designed combustion
chamber seal. There is an elastomer gasket between the cylinder head and cylinder head cover.

Camshaft
The camshaft is forged from steel and is induction hardened. It is mounted in ve bearings in the crankcase.
The camshaft drive onto the camshaft gear comes from the spur-toothed crankshaft gear.

Engine lubrication
The engine is lubricated by forced-feed lubrication for all bearing points. The engine oil lter and the oil cooler
are grouped together as an oil module. The oil level in the oil sump is measured by means of a dipstick and
using an oil level sensor.

Cooling system
The cooling circuit is a thermostat-controlled, forced-circulation cooling system with a maintenance-free
coolant pump that is driven by a poly-V-belt. The thermostat is an exchangeable insert with wax elements as
expansion elements. The connection for the heater feed is located on the thermostat housing.

Intercooler
The intercooler consists of a high-pressure section and a low-pressure section.

24 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTRODUCTION

Around 10% of the coolant ow is diverted from the main cooling circuit for the engine downstream of the
coolant pump. The diverted coolant ows through a dedicated, second cooler - the low-temperature coolant
cooler - which is arranged directly upstream of the main coolant cooler. The low-temperature coolant is further
cooled by the airow and is therefore cooler than the coolant in the engine circuit. The low-temperature
coolant is then directed through the low-pressure and high-pressure intercooler, each of which absorbs the
heat of the low-temperature coolant.

Advantages of this low-temperature intercooling include the increased turbocharger charging, the reduction
in the engine's thermal load, a reduction in NOx emissions, the omission of the charge-air pipes to the vehicle
front and an improvement in the specic fuel consumption.

Intake/exhaust system
The three-section exhaust manifold is made of high temperature-resistant nodular cast iron and secured to
the cylinder head using heat-resistant bolts. The maintenance-free turbocharger is mounted on the middle
exhaust manifold. The exhaust manifold is installed downstream of the turbocharger. The turbocharger is
lubricated by the engine oil circuit.

Fuel system
The fuel system consists of a low-pressure system and a high-pressure system. The low-pressure system
includes the fuel lines, the hand pump and the fuel service centre (KSC). The fuel service centre comprises
a pre-lter and a special microlter with water separation to ensure the degree of fuel purity required by the
common-rail system. The low-pressure system also includes a heating element and the ame start system.
The interface to the high-pressure system is the fuel pump.

High-pressure system
The high-pressure system consists of the ow-rate-controlled high-pressure pump with ange-mounted fuel
pump and the rail with rail-pressure sensor and pressure limiting valve. Solenoid valve-controlled injectors
with rail connections and high-pressure lines which meet the necessary requirements are also installed.

Injection pressure generation and fuel injection are separate in the high-pressure system. The injection
pressure is generated by the high-pressure pump, irrespective of the engine speed and the required injection
quantity. The injection quantity is available in the rail for injection via the injectors. The high-pressure pump
delivery quantity is controlled by a proportional valve. The injection point and the injection quantity are
calculated in the engine control unit and implemented by the solenoid valve-controlled injectors.

The solenoid valve-controlled injectors allow multiple injections:

1 Pilot injection to improve combustion, reduce combustion noise and reduce peak combustion pressures.
2 Main injection to introduce the energy for the required engine power output.
3 Post injection to reduce the pollutant emissions, main constituent NOX.

Always ensure absolute cleanliness both in and around the working area whenever carrying out work on the
highly sensitive high-pressure system.

injectors
The injectors are controlled by solenoid valve. They are arranged vertically in the cylinder head and clamped
with a pressure ange in the cylinder head.

Flame start system


Special equipment includes a ame start system which serves as a cold starting aid. The ame start system
consists of a solenoid valve and a rapid ame glow plug built into the charge-air manifold. After various
parameter enquiries (via sensors), the ame glow plug and the corresponding solenoid valve are activated
by the EDC in order to heat the intake air. The fuel is supplied by the fuel service centre (KSC).

Starter
The starter is a reduction-gear starter. The starter shaft is guided without a thrust bearing on the housing in
the starter. A mechanical relay is mounted in the starter for starter control.

Alternator
A compact, powerful, low-noise alternator is mounted for power generation. The alternator is equipped with
a multifunction controller. The voltage is controlled depending on the temperature, the battery charge level
and the current power consumption. The alternator speed is four times the engine speed.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 25


INTRODUCTION

Air compressor
The air compressor is driven by the straight-cut camshaft gear.

Front power take-off


The power take-off serves as an alternator drive and consists of the housing, the power take-off shaft mounted
in ball bearings and the poly-V-belt pulley. The power take-off is driven indirectly by the air compressor gear.
There are two opposite-facing lugs cast onto both the power take-off shaft and the air compressor gear. The
cross-slotted driver plate engages in these lugs to create a non-rigid connection and ensures a driving effect.
The poly-V-belt pulley used for driving the alternator by means of poly-V-belt is mounted on the power take-off
shaft.

Rear power take-off


The rear power take-off is mounted on the ywheel housing. Helical intermediate gears and intermediate
gear pins are installed between the ywheel housing and the plate in the ywheel housing. The rear power
take-off is driven indirectly by an additional crankshaft gear on the ywheel side of the crankshaft. The power
is transferred from the crankshaft gear to the power take-off via the intermediate gears. The rear power
take-off serves as a permanent drive system for hydraulic pumps, for example.

Power steering pump


The power steering pump is mounted at the rear of the air compressor, in accordance with its design.

26 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

ENGINE ELECTRICS

(1) Speed sensor (8) Heating element


(2) Oil level sensor (9) Pressure sensor
(3) Flame glow plug (10) Rail-pressure sensor
(4) Temperature sensor (11) Pressure transmitter
(5) Temperature sensor (12) Metering unit
(6) EGR positioning cylinder (13) Charge-pressure sensor
(7) Speed sensor

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 27


ENGINE ELECTRICS

WIRING HARNESS
Removing and installing the wiring harness

(1) Earth cable (3) Cable duct


(2) Cable duct cover (4) Engine wiring harness

Technical data
Cable socket mounting nut.................................... M5 ..................................................................... 5 Nm
Terminal B + mounting nut .................................... M8 ....................................................................13 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
Before removing the wiring harness, mark the installation position of the cable tie(s) and disconnect.
After installing the wiring harness, install the cable tie(s) as marked.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 29


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Removing the wiring harness Disconnecting the charge-air manifold pressure


sensor electrical connection
Disconnecting the control valve electrical
connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) Disconnecting the oil level sensor electrical
connection
Disconnecting the proportional valve electrical
connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (2)


• Free the oil level sensor wiring harness (1)
• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)
Disconnecting the refrigerant compressor
Disconnecting the EGR positioning cylinder electrical connection
electrical connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)

30 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Disconnecting the alternator electrical Disconnecting the charge-pressure sensor


connection electrical connection

• Release and pull off the compact connector (3) • Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the
• Disconnect the cable tie (2) charge-pressure sensor (2)
• Unscrew the terminal B+ mounting nut (1)
• Free the wiring harnesses Disconnecting the ame start system electrical
connections
Disconnecting the speed sensor electrical
connection

• Unscrew the mounting nut (2)


• Remove the cable lug (1) with mounting nut (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1) • Disconnect the electrical connection (3) for the
• Disconnect the electrical connection (2) solenoid valve (4)
• Free the wiring harnesses
Unclipping the engine wiring harness

• Unclip the engine wiring harness (2) from the


holder (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 31


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Disconnecting the metering unit electrical Disconnecting the rail-pressure sensor


connection electrical connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the • Disconnect the electrical connection (1)
metering unit (2)
Disconnecting the EGR module temperature
Disconnecting the pressure transmitter sensor electrical connection
electrical connection

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the


• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the temperature sensor (2)
pressure transmitter (2)
Disconnecting the air distributor pipe
Disconnecting the rail-pressure sensor temperature sensor electrical connection
electrical connection (Euro 4)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (2) for the


• Disconnect the electrical connection (2) for the temperature sensor (1)
rail-pressure sensor (1)

32 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Disconnecting the fuel service centre electrical Removing the speed sensor
connections

• Remove the speed sensor (1) from the ywheel


housing (2)

Disconnecting the engine control unit electrical


connections

• Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical


connection (1)
• Disconnect the heating element electrical
connection (3)
• Disconnect the cable tie (2)
• Release and pull off the connectors (1), (2) and (3)
Disconnecting the proportional valve electrical
connection (Euro 4) Exposing the engine wiring harness

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the • Free the engine wiring harness (1)
proportional valve (2)
• Free the wiring harness (3) for the proportional
valve (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 33


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Removing the cable duct cover Removing the cable duct

• Open the locking pin (1) a quarter turn • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the cable duct cover (2) • Remove the cable duct (2), place it to the side and
secure
Disconnecting the plug bracket electrical
connection

• Disconnect the electrical connections (1) for the


plug brackets

Disconnect the EGR positioning cylinder


electrical connection

• Disconnect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical


connections (1)

34 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Installing the wiring harness Mounting the cable duct cover

Mounting the cable duct

• Put on the cable duct cover (2)


• Close the locking pin (1) a quarter turn
• Position the cable duct (2) with the wiring harness
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) Routing the engine wiring harness

Connect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical


connection

• Route the wiring harness (1) so it is not under


tension, not kinked and there are no chang points
• Secure the wiring harness (1) with cable ties
• Connect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical
connections (1)

Connecting the plug bracket electrical


connections

• Connect the plug bracket electrical connections


(1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 35


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Connecting the engine control unit electrical Connecting the proportional valve electrical
connections connection (Euro 4)

WARNING • Connect the electrical connection (1) for the


Danger of irreparable engine control proportional valve (2)
unit damage • Route the wiring harness (3) so it is not under
• When installing the connectors, rst tension, not kinked and there are no chang points
fully open the lock and then insert and
Connecting the fuel service centre electrical
lock the connectors
connections
• Insert and lock the connectors (1), (2) and (3) in
the engine control unit
• Route the wiring harnesses and secure using
cable ties

Installing the speed sensor

• Install the speed sensor (1) in the ywheel housing


(2)

• Connect the pressure sensor electrical connection


(1)
• Connect the heating element electrical connection
(3)
• Route the wiring harnesses so that they are not
under tension, not kinked and there are no chang
points
• Secure the wiring harnesses with cable ties (2)

36 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Connecting the air distributor pipe temperature Connecting the rail-pressure sensor electrical
sensor electrical connection connection (Euro 4)

• Connect the electrical connection (2) for the • Connect the electrical connection (2) for the
temperature sensor (1) rail-pressure sensor (1)
Connecting the EGR module temperature sensor Connecting the pressure transmitter electrical
electrical connection connection

• Connect the electrical connection (1) for the • Connect the electrical connection (1) for the
temperature sensor (2) pressure transmitter (2)

Connecting the rail-pressure sensor electrical Connecting the metering unit electrical
connection (Euro 5 and EEV) connection

• Connect the electrical connection (1) • Connect the electrical connection (1) for the
metering unit (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 37


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Connecting the ame start system electrical Clipping in the engine wiring harness
connections

• Clip the engine wiring harness (2) into the holder


• Route the wiring harnesses so that they are not (1)
under tension, not kinked, and there are no chang
points Connecting the speed sensor electrical
• Position the cable lug (1) at the ame glow plug connection
with the mounting nut (2)
• Screw on the mounting nut (2) and tighten it to 5
Nm
• Connect the electrical connection (3) for the
solenoid valve (4)

Connecting the charge-pressure sensor


electrical connection

• Connect the electrical connection (2)


• Position the fastening clamp, then screw in and
tighten the mounting bolt (1)

• Connect the electrical connection (1) for the


charge-pressure sensor (2)

38 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Connecting the alternator electrical connection Connecting the oil level sensor electrical
connection

• Route the wiring harnesses so that they are not


under tension, not kinked, and there are no chang • Route the wiring harness for the oil level sensor
points (1) so that it is not under tension, not kinked and
• Screw on the terminal B+ mounting nut (1) and there are no chang points
tighten it to 13 Nm • Connect the electrical connection (2)
• Insert and lock the compact connector (3)
• Secure the wiring harnesses with cable ties (2) Connecting the charge-air manifold pressure
sensor electrical connection
Connecting the refrigerant compressor
electrical connection

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

• Connect the electrical connection (1) Connecting the EGR positioning cylinder
electrical connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 39


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Connecting the proportional valve electrical


connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

Connecting the control valve electrical


connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

40 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE ELECTRICS

ENGINE ELECTRICS
Removing and installing the engine electrics
Additional jobs
– Reading out the fault memory with MAN-cats®

(1) Speed sensor (8) Heater element


(2) Oil level sensor (9) Pressure sensor
(3) Flame glow plug (10) Rail-pressure sensor
(4) Temperature sensor (11) Pressure transmitter
(5) Temperature sensor (12) Metering unit
(6) EGR positioning cylinder (13) Charge-pressure sensor
(7) Speed sensor

Technical data
Mounting bolt, speed sensor (1) ............................ M6x16-8.8 .......................................................... 8 Nm
Oil level sensor (2)................................................ M22x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Flame glow plug (3) .............................................. M20x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Temperature sensor (4)......................................... M16x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Temperature sensor (5)......................................... M16x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Mounting bolt, speed sensor (7) ............................ M6x16-8.8 .......................................................... 8 Nm
Pressure sensor (9) .............................................. M18x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Rail-pressure sensor (10)...................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................70 Nm
Pressure transmitter (11)....................................... M18x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Mounting bolts, charge-pressure sensor (13) ......... M6x16-10.9 .......................................................10 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 41


ENGINE ELECTRICS

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
WARNING
Restricted operation due to incorrect entries in the fault memory
• Before removing switches or sensors, read out and document the fault memory
• Always install switches and sensors with new O-rings or sealing rings
• After installing switches or sensors, read out the fault memory and, if necessary, delete it.

42 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

COOLING SYSTEM

(1) Fan (5) Thermostat housing


(2) Coolant manifold (6) Coolant line, heater feed
(3) Coolant outlet pipe (7) Coolant pump
(4) Thermostat (8) Adapter ange

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 43


COOLING SYSTEM

FAN
Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704)

(1) Fan clutch (5) Poly-V-belt pulley


(2) Fan (6) Mounting bolt
(3) Mounting bolt (7) Mounting bolt
(4) Adapter ange

Technical data
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x20-10.9 .......................................................20 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
WARNING
Malfunction due to incorrect storage of fan clutch
• Always store the fan clutch in its installation position

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 45


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the fan Removing the fan and adapter ange (variant
with hydraulic pump)
Removing the fan and adapter ange (variant
without hydraulic pump and Grosskopf
alternator)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the fan (4)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the adapter ange (2)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the fan (2)
• Remove the hydraulic pump V-belt, see Removing
and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, 89
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (5)
• Remove the V-belt pulley (4) and the adapter
ange (3)

46 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the fan and adapter ange (variant Installing the fan
with Grosskopf alternator)
Installing the fan clutch

• Insert the fan clutch (1) into the fan (2)


• Screw in new mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 20
Nm

Mounting the fan and adapter ange (variant


without hydraulic pump and Grosskopf
alternator)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the fan (2)
• Remove the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt, see
Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator
belt drive, 86
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (5)
• Remove the poly-V-belt pulley (4) and the adapter
ange (3)

Removing the fan clutch • Position the adapter ange (2) on the vibration
damper
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Position the fan (4)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)


• Remove the fan clutch (1) from the fan (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 47


COOLING SYSTEM

Mounting the fan and adapter ange (variant with Mounting the fan and adapter ange (variant with
hydraulic pump) Grosskopf alternator)

• Position the adapter ange (3) and V-belt pulley • Position the adapter ange (3) and poly-V-belt
(4) on the vibration damper pulley (4) on the vibration damper
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (5) • Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (5)
• Mount the hydraulic pump V-belt, see Removing • Remove the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt, see
and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, 89 Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator
• Position the fan (2) belt drive, 86
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) • Position the fan (2)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

48 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725)

(1) Fan clutch (4) Mounting nut


(2) Mounting bolt (5) Fan
(3) Adapter ange (6) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Mounting nut (4) ................................................... M8-8 .................................................................22 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
WARNING
Malfunction due to incorrect setting aside of the fan clutch
• Always set aside the fan clutch in its installation position

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 49


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the fan Removing the adapter ange (variant with


hydraulic pump)
Removing the fan support arm

• Remove the hydraulic pump V-belt, see Removing


• Disconnect the fan electrical connection and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, 89
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the support arm (2) • Remove the adapter ange (3) with the hydraulic
pump V-belt pulley (2)
Removing the fan
Removing the adapter ange (variant with
Grosskopf alternator)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the fan (1)
• Remove the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt, see
Removing the adapter ange (variant without Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator
hydraulic pump and Grosskopf alternator) belt drive, 86
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the adapter ange (3) with the Grosskopf
alternator poly-V-belt pulley (2)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the adapter ange (2)

50 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the fan clutch Installing the fan


Installing the fan clutch

• Unscrew the mounting nuts (3)


• Remove the fan clutch (1) from the fan (2)
• Insert the fan clutch (1) into the fan (2)
• Screw on the new mounting nuts (3) and tighten
them to 22 Nm

Mounting the adapter ange (variant without


hydraulic pump and Grosskopf alternator)

• Position the adapter ange (2) on the vibration


damper
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 51


COOLING SYSTEM

Mounting the adapter ange (variant with Mounting the fan


hydraulic pump)

• Position the fan (1)


• Position the adapter ange (3) with the hydraulic • Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (2)
pump V-belt pulley (2) on the vibration damper
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) Mounting the fan support arm
• Mount the hydraulic pump V-belt, see Removing
and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, 89

Mounting the adapter ange (variant with


Grosskopf alternator)

• Position the support arm (2)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (1)
• Connect the fan electrical connection

• Position the adapter ange (3) with the Grosskopf


alternator poly-V-belt pulley (2) on the vibration
damper
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)
• Mount the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt, see
Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator
belt drive, 86

52 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

COOLANT MANIFOLD
Removing and installing the coolant manifold
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93

(1) Coolant line, heater feed (4) Holder


(2) Coolant pump (5) Coolant outlet pipe
(3) Coolant manifold (6) O-ring

Technical data
Thermostat opening temperature...................................................................................................... 83 °C

Important information
WARNING
Thermostats with the incorrect opening temperature damage the engine
• Always use thermostats with the specied opening temperature

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 53


COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

54 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the coolant manifold Installing the coolant manifold


Detaching the air compressor line Mounting the coolant manifold

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) • Fit the coolant manifold (3) with a new gasket (1)
• Remove the fastening clamps (3) and position it
• Detach the air compressor line (1) • Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) as marked
and then tighten them
Removing the coolant manifold
Attaching the air compressor line

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(2) • Attach the air compressor line (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) • Position the fastening clamps (3)
• Remove the coolant manifold (3) with gasket (1) • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)
• Clean the mating faces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 55


COOLING SYSTEM

THERMOSTAT WITH THERMOSTAT HOUSING


Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing

(1) Holder (5) Bulkhead tting


(2) Coolant outlet pipe (6) Thermostat housing
(3) O-ring (7) Unscrewed conduit
(4) Thermostat (8) Gasket

Technical data
Bulkhead tting (5)................................................ M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm
Opening temperature of thermostat (4) ............................................................................................. 83 °C

Service products
Radiator antifreeze ............................................................................................................ 09.21001-0002

Important information
WARNING
Thermostats with the incorrect opening temperature damage the engine
• Always use thermostats with the specied opening temperature

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 57


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the thermostat with Removing the thermostat


thermostat housing
Undoing the air compressor line

• Remove the thermostat (2) with O-ring (3) from the


thermostat housing (1)
• Clean the mating faces
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)
Detaching the heater feed coolant line
Detaching the thermostat housing coolant line

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (4)


• Unlock and remove the plug connection for the • Unscrew the hollow screw (1) and remove it with
coolant line (2) by pressing the spring clip (1) the sealing rings (2)
• Remove the coolant line (3)
Detaching the coolant outlet pipe

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)


• Remove the holder (1)
• Remove the coolant outlet pipe (2) from the
thermostat housing
• Clean the mating faces

58 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the thermostat housing Installing the thermostat and thermostat


housing
Assembling the thermostat housing

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1) and (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2)
• Remove the thermostat housing (3) with gasket • Screw in the bulkhead tting (1) with a new sealing
(4) from the timing case ring (2) and tighten to 45 Nm
• Clean the mating faces • Thinly apply Radiator antifreeze on the new
unscrewed conduit (3)
Dismantling the thermostat housing • Insert the unscrewed conduit (3) into the
thermostat housing (4)

Mounting the thermostat housing

• Unscrew the bulkhead tting (1) and remove with


the sealing ring (2)
• Pull the unscrewed conduit (3) out of the
thermostat housing (4) • Fit the thermostat housing (3) with a new gasket
(4) and then position it on the timing case
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and (2) as
marked
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) and (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 59


COOLING SYSTEM

Attaching the heater feed coolant line Attaching the thermostat housing coolant line

• Position the coolant line (3)


WARNING
• Fit the hollow screw (1) with new sealing rings (2),
Component damage due to loose plug
screw in and tighten
connection
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (4)
• Check the coolant line plug connection
Installing the thermostat for rm seating after securing

• Mount the plug connection for the coolant line (2)


• If necessary, undo the plug connection for the
coolant line (2) by pressing the spring clip (1), then
reinsert and secure it

Fastening the air compressor line

• Insert the thermostat (2) into the thermostat


housing (1) with the TOP mark facing upwards
• Insert the new O-ring (3)

Attaching the coolant outlet pipe

• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (1)

• Position the coolant outlet pipe (2) and holder (1)


on the thermostat housing
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (3)

60 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

COOLANT PUMP
Removing and installing the coolant pump
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Mounting bolt (4) Coolant pump


(2) Poly-V-belt pulley (5) Gasket
(3) Mounting bolt (6) Bulkhead tting

Technical data
Bulkhead tting (6)................................................ M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 61


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the coolant pump Detaching the coolant pump coolant line

Removing the poly-V-belt

• Unlock and remove the plug connection for the


coolant line (2) by pressing the spring clips (1)
CAUTION
Removing the poly-V-belt pulley
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Undo the mounting bolts (3)


• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise
as far as the stop and hold it
• Remove the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

Detaching the air compressor line

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Pull off the poly-V-belt pulley (2)

Removing the coolant pump

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the fastening clamps (3)
• Detach the air compressor line (1)

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the coolant pump (2) with gasket (3)
• Clean the mating faces

62 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Removing the bulkhead tting Installing the coolant pump


Installing the bulkhead tting

• Unscrew the bulkhead tting (1) and remove with


the O-ring (2)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the new O-ring (2)
• Screw in the bulkhead tting (1) with O-ring (2) and
tighten to 45 Nm

Mounting the coolant pump

• Mount the coolant pump (2) with a new gasket (3)


• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) as marked
and then tighten them

Mounting the poly-V-belt pulley

• Position the poly-V-belt pulley (2)


• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and tighten
them by hand

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 63


COOLING SYSTEM

Attaching the coolant pump coolant line Mounting the poly-V-belt

WARNING CAUTION
Component damage due to loose plug The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
connection spring tension
• Check the coolant line plug connection • Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
for rm seating after securing to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally
• Mount the plug connection for the coolant line (2)
• If necessary, undo the plug connection for the • Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise
coolant line (2) by pressing the spring clip (1), then as far as the stop and hold it
reinsert and secure it • Fit the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)
Attaching the air compressor line • Tighten the mounting bolts (3)

• Attach the air compressor line (1)


• Position the fastening clamps (3)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

64 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Dismantling and assembling the coolant pump


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61

(1) Coolant pump housing (4) Bearing


(2) Slide ring seal (5) Circlip
(3) Impeller (6) Hub

Technical data
Projection of slide ring seal (2) ........................................................................................... 10.0 - 10.4 mm
Dimension, impeller (cast iron) (3) - coolant pump housing (1) ......................................... 33.60 - 33.80 mm
Dimension, impeller (plastic) (3) - coolant pump housing (1) ............................................ 33.10 - 33.30 mm

Service products
Radiator antifreeze ............................................................................................................ 09.21001-0002

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 65


COOLING SYSTEM

Special tools

[1] Three-armed puller 08.99605-9014

• Pulling off the coolant pump hub

[2] Installer sleeve 80.99617-0029

• Pressing out the coolant pump slide ring seal


• Pressing out the bearing

[3] Plug-on handle 80.99617-0187

• Pressing in the coolant pump slide ring seal in


conjunction with:
• Installer [5]
• Washer [4]

[4] Washer 80.99617-0144

• Pressing in the coolant pump slide seal ring

[5] Installer 80.99617-0191

• Pressing in the coolant pump slide seal ring

[6] Depth gauge (electronic) 08.71195-9003

• Measuring the slide ring seal press-in depth

66 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Dismantling the coolant pump Removing the slide ring seal

Removing the coolant pump hub

• Press the slide ring seal (2) out of the coolant


pump housing (1) using the Installer sleeve [2]
• Brace the impeller for the coolant pump (1)
• Pull off the hub (3) using the Three-armed puller [1]

• Detach the circlip (2) from the coolant pump (1)

Removing the impeller

• Lay the coolant pump housing (3) on the opposing


sleeve (1)
• Press out the bearing (2) using the Installer
sleeve [2]
• Remove the impeller (4)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 67


COOLING SYSTEM

Assembling the coolant pump Checking the projection

Installing the bearing

• Check the projection between the slide ring seal


and the coolant pump housing (1) using the Depth
WARNING gauge (electronic) [6] (2)
Component damage on the coolant The permitted projection is 10.0 - 10.4 mm.
pump housing due to incorrect
If the projection is more than 10.0 - 10.4 mm, adjust
pressing-in of the bearing
the slide ring seal.
• Carefully press in the new bearing at
the bearing outer race until the stop is Mounting the coolant pump hub
reached
• Use a suitable sleeve as a brace

• Press the bearing (2) into the coolant pump


housing (1) until the stop is reached
• Attach the circlip (3)

Installing the slide ring seal

• Press the hub (2) onto the bearing (1) until ush

• Thinly apply a mixture of 50 % water and


50 % Radiator antifreeze on the slide ring seal (2)
and coolant pump shaft
• Assemble the special tool consisting of the
Plug-on handle [3] (3), Washer [4] and Installer [5]

• Use the special tool to press the slide ring seal (2)
into the coolant pump housing (1) until the stop is
reached

68 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COOLING SYSTEM

Pressing on the impeller (cast iron)

• Press on the impeller (2) until dimension A 33.60


- 33.80 mm is reached
The permitted dimension A between the impeller (2)
and the coolant pump housing (1) is 33.60 - 33.80
mm.

If the dimension A is more than 33.60 - 33.80 mm,


adjust the impeller (2).

If the dimension A is less than 33.60 - 33.80 mm,


pull off the impeller (2) and press on a new impeller
(2).

Pressing on the impeller (plastic)

• Press on the impeller (2) until dimension A 33.10


- 33.30 mm is reached
The permitted dimension A between the impeller (2)
and the coolant pump housing (1) is 33.10 - 33.30
mm.

If the dimension A is more than 33.10 - 33.30 mm,


adjust the impeller (2).

If the dimension A is less than 33.10 - 33.30 mm,


pull off the impeller (2) and press on a new impeller
(2).

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 69


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

MOUNTED COMPONENTS

(1) 1-cylinder air compressor (7) Refrigerant compressor


(2) Power steering pump (8) Guide roller
(3) Coolant pump poly-V-belt pulley (9) Power take-off poly-V-belt pulley
(4) Starter (10) Alternator poly-V-belt tensioner
(5) Refrigerant compressor poly-V-belt (11) Alternator poly-V-belt
(6) Refrigerant compressor poly-V-belt (12) Alternator
tensioner

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 71


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

POWER TAKE-OFF
Removing and installing the power take-off
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Driver plate (5) Poly-V-belt pulley


(2) O-ring (6) Mounting bolt
(3) Power take-off (7) Timing case cover
(4) Mounting bolt (left-hand thread)

Technical data
Mounting bolt (left-hand thread) (4)........................ M16x1.5x45-8.8 LH.......................Initial torque 100 Nm
Mounting bolt (left-hand thread) (4)........................ M16x1.5x45-8.8 LH..............................Final torque 90°

Service products
Technical Vaseline ............................................................................................................. 09.15014-0017

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 73


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the power take-off Removing the poly-V-belt pulley

Removing the alternator poly-V-belt

Note
The mounting bolt has a left-hand thread.
CAUTION
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt pulley (2)
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)
to prevent it from springing back
• Remove the poly-V-belt pulley (2) from the power
unintentionally
take-off (3)
• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise
as far as the stop and hold it
• Remove the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

74 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the power take-off Installing the power take-off


Mounting the power take-off

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the power take-off (4) with driver plate (2)
and O-ring (3) • Fit the driver plate (2) with the thin side on the air
compressor gear
• Thinly apply Technical Vaseline on a new O-ring
(3) and place on the power take-off (4)
• Position the power take-off (4)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 75


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Mounting the poly-V-belt pulley Mounting the alternator poly-V-belt

Note CAUTION
The mounting bolt has a left-hand thread. The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
• Place the poly-V-belt pulley (2) on the power to prevent it from springing back
take-off (3) unintentionally
• Screw in the new mounting bolt (1)
• Brace the poly-V-belt pulley (2) • Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise
• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to Initial torque 100 as far as the stop and hold it
Nm • Fit the poly-V-belt (1)
• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to Final torque 90° • Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

76 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

AIR COMPRESSOR
Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging), see 213
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218

(1) O-ring (6) Driver


(2) O-ring (7) O-ring
(3) 1-cylinder air compressor (8) power steering pump
(4) Pressure-relief valve (9) Mounting bolt
(5) Elbow joint (10) Support

Service products
Technical Vaseline ............................................................................................................. 09.15014-0017

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 77


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

78 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the air compressor Removing the air compressor

Removing the power steering pump

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (5) and (6)


• Remove the support (4)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (5) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (7)
• Remove the power steering pump (4) with driver • Pull the air compressor (3) out of the timing case
(2) and O-ring (3) from the air compressor (1) • Remove the O-rings (1) and (2)
• Remove the O-ring (3) from the power steering
pump (4)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 79


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the air compressor Mounting the power steering pump

Installing the air compressor

• Check the driver (2) for wear and replace as


necessary
• Thinly apply Technical Vaseline on a new O-ring • Insert the driver (2) into the air compressor (1)
(1) and t it on the air compressor (3) • Fit the new O-ring (3) on the power steering pump
• Thinly apply Technical Vaseline on a new O-ring (4)
(2) and insert it into the air compressor (3) • Insert the power steering pump (4) into the air
• Insert the air compressor (3) into the timing case compressor (1)
• Screw in the mounting bolts (7) • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (5)
• Position the support (4)
• Screw in the mounting bolts (5) and (6)
• Tighten the mounting bolts (7)
• Tighten the mounting bolts (5) and (6)

80 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

BELT DRIVE
Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or
hydraulic pump)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Coolant pump poly-V-belt pulley (6) Mounting bolt


(2) Vibration damper poly-V-belt pulley (7) Guide roller
(3) Refrigerant compressor poly-V-belt (8) Power take-off poly-V-belt pulley
(4) Refrigerant compressor poly-V-belt (9) Alternator poly-V-belt tensioner
tensioner (10) Alternator poly-V-belt
(5) Refrigerant compressor

Technical data
Poly-V-belt tensioner mounting bolt for alternator
(9) ....................................................................... M10x70-10.9......................................................47 Nm
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M10x70-10.9......................................................47 Nm
Mounting bolt, guide roller (7) ................................ M12x80-10.9......................................................60 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 81


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the belt drive Removing the refrigerant compressor


poly-V-belt tensioner
Removing the refrigerant compressor
poly-V-belt

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (5)


• Remove the poly-V-belt tensioner (4)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)
• Remove the guide roller (2) with spacer sleeve (3)

CAUTION
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise


as far as the stop and hold it
• Remove the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

82 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the alternator poly-V-belt Installing the belt drive


Mounting the alternator poly-V-belt tensioner

• Position the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)


• Screw in the new mounting bolt (1) and tighten to
47 Nm

CAUTION
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise


as far as the stop and hold it
• Remove the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

Removing the alternator poly-V-belt tensioner

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)


• Remove the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 83


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Mounting the alternator poly-V-belt Mounting the refrigerant compressor poly-V-belt


tensioner

• Position the poly-V-belt tensioner (4)


• Screw in the new mounting bolt (5) and tighten to
47 Nm
• Position the guide roller (2) with spacer sleeve (3)
• Screw in the new mounting bolt (1) and tighten to
60 Nm

CAUTION
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise


as far as the stop and hold it
• Fit the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

84 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Mounting the refrigerant compressor poly-V-belt

CAUTION
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise


as far as the stop and hold it
• Fit the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 85


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Vibration damper (4) Poly-V-belt pulley


(2) Pressure spring (5) Mounting bolt
(3) Poly-V-belt tensioner (6) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Mounting bolt, pressure spring (2) ......................... M10x45-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolt, pressure spring (2) ......................... M12x40-10.9....................................................120 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

86 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the belt drive Removing the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt


tensioner
Removing the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2)


• Remove the pressure spring (5)
CAUTION
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (3)
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
• Remove the poly-V-belt tensioner (4)
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (1) anti-clockwise


as far as the stop and hold it
• Remove the poly-V-belt (2)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (1)

Removing the Grosskopf alternator guide roller

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)


• Remove the guide roller (2) with carrier (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 87


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the belt drive Mounting the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt

Mounting the Grosskopf alternator poly-V-belt


tensioner

CAUTION
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
• Position the poly-V-belt tensioner (4) spring tension
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (3) • Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner
• Position the pressure spring (5) to prevent it from springing back
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and (2) unintentionally
• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to 120 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolt (2) to 65 Nm • Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (1) anti-clockwise
as far as the stop and hold it
Mounting the Grosskopf alternator guide roller • Fit the poly-V-belt (2)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (1)

• Position the guide roller (2) with carrier (3)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (1)

88 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Support (4) V-belt


(2) Hydraulic pump (5) V-belt pulley
(3) Tensioning pulley (6) Mounting nut

Technical data
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) when newly mounted ..........................................................................500 N
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) after running for longer than 10 min......................................................350 N

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 89


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Special tools

[7] Tension tester 81.66814-6001

• Checking the V-belt tension

90 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the belt drive Installing the belt drive


Undoing the tensioning pulley mounting nut Tensioning the V-belt

• Undo the mounting nut (1) • Put on the V-belt (2)


• Screw in the tensioning bolt (1)
Removing the V-belt
Checking the V-belt tension

• Unscrew the tensioning bolt (1) until the V-belt (2)


has been fully relieved, or unscrew the tensioning Note
bolt (1) even further, as necessary Do not continue to apply pressure after
• Remove the V-belt (2) the spring has unclipped; this falsies the
measuring result.
The measurement must be repeated.

• Place Tension tester [7] (4) on the longest point


between two contact points of the V-belt (3)
• Press the pressure pad (2) perpendicular to the
V-belt (3) until the spring of Tension tester [7] (4)
unclips
• Read off the tension value at the point where the
upper edge of the indicator arm (1) intersects the
scale
• Tensioning force of V-belt (3), see Technical data,
89
• Re-tension the V-belt (3) if the V-belt (3) tensioning
force differs from this value

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 91


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Tightening the tensioning pulley mounting nut

• Tighten the mounting nut (1)

92 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89

(1) Guide roller (3) Poly-V-belts


(2) Poly-V-belt pulley (4) Poly-V-belt pulley

Technical data
Mounting bolt, guide roller (1) ................................ M 12x80-10.9.....................................................60 Nm
Length, poly-V-belt (3) ................................................................................................................1366 mm
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3)........................................................................................... 75 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3).........................................................................................121 N
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3)............... Running time 15 minutes ...................................... 54 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3).............. Running time 15 minutes .....................................102 N

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 93


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Special tools

[8] Assembly tool 51.99603-0003

• Removing and mounting the poly-V-belt

[9] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:


• Gear ratchet [10]

[10] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

94 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the belt drive Removing the poly-V-belt

Attaching the engine barring gear

CAUTION
• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing Risk of injury due to trapping
• Mount the Engine barring gear [9] (1) on the • Do not place your hands between the
ywheel housing poly-V-belt pulley and the poly-V-belt
when the engine is being cranked
Removing the guide roller Note
Perform the work with support.

• Place the Assembly tool [8] (2) on the poly-V-belt


pulley (1)
• Crank the engine in the engine's running direction
with the Engine barring gear [9] and the Gear
ratchet [10] whilst pulling the poly-V-belt off the
poly-V-belt pulley (1)

• Unscrew the mounting bolt for the guide roller (1)


• Remove the guide roller (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 95


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the belt drive Mounting the poly-V-belt

Positioning the assembly tool

• Crank the engine in the engine's running direction


with the Engine barring gear [9] and the Gear
• Place the Assembly tool [8] (1) on the poly-V-belt ratchet [10] until the poly-V-belt (1) is lying fully
pulley on the poly-V-belt pulley

Pre-tensioning the poly-V-belt Removing the assembly tool

• Place a new poly-V-belt (3) on the poly-V-belt • Remove the Assembly tool [8]
pulley on the refrigerant compressor (1) and
engine Mounting the guide roller
• Pre-tension the poly-V-belt (3) using the Assembly
tool [8] (2)

• Press the poly-V-belt downwards


• Position the guide roller (1)
• Screw in the mounting bolt for the guide roller (1)
and tighten it to 60 Nm

96 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the engine barring gear

• Remove the Engine barring gear [9] (1) from the


ywheel housing
• Mount the cover on the ywheel housing

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 97


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with two guide rollers)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89

(1) Mounting bolt (4) Poly-V-belt


(2) Mounting bolt (5) Guide roller
(3) Guide roller

Technical data
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M10x100-10.9....................................................47 Nm
Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M12x80-10.9......................................................60 Nm
Length, poly-V-belt (4) ................................................................................................................1418 mm
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4)........................................................................................... 51 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4).......................................................................................... 87 N
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4)............... Running time 15 minutes ...................................... 39 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4).............. Running time 15 minutes ...................................... 75 N

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

98 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Special tools

[11] Assembly tool 51.99603-0003

• Removing and mounting the poly-V-belt

[12] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:


• Gear ratchet [13]

[13] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

[14] Tension tester 81.66814-6001

• Checking the poly-V-belt tension

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 99


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the belt drive Removing the guide roller

Attaching the engine barring gear

• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing


• Mount the Engine barring gear [12] (1) on the
ywheel housing

Removing the poly-V-belt

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (6)


• Remove the guide rollers (3) with washer (5)
• Remove the spacer sleeves (2) and (4)

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to trapping
• Do not place your hands between the
poly-V-belt pulley and the poly-V-belt
when the engine is being cranked
Note
Perform the work with support.

• Put the Assembly tool [11] (1) on the poly-V-belt


pulley (2)
• Crank the engine in the engine's running direction
with the Engine barring gear [12] and the Gear
ratchet [13] whilst pulling the poly-V-belt (3) off the
poly-V-belt pulley (2)
• Remove the Assembly tool [11] (1)

100 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the belt drive Pre-tensioning the poly-V-belt

Mounting the guide rollers

Note
The poly-V-belt must run on the rear four
grooves of the refrigerant compressor
poly-V-belt pulley.

• Put the new poly-V-belt (1) on the poly-V-belt


pulleys (3) and (4)
• Pre-tension the poly-V-belt (1) using the Assembly
tool [11] (2)

Mounting the poly-V-belt

• Position the spacer sleeves (2) and (4)


• Position the guide rollers (3) with washer (5)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and (6)
• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to 60 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolt (6) to 47 Nm

Positioning the assembly tool

• Crank the engine in the engine's running direction


with the Engine barring gear [12] and the Gear
ratchet [13] until the poly-V-belt (2) is lying fully on
the poly-V-belt pulley (1)
• Remove the Assembly tool [11] (3)

• Put the Assembly tool [11] (2) on the crankshaft


poly-V-belt pulley (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 101


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the engine barring gear Checking the V-belt tension

• Remove the Engine barring gear [12] (1) from the


Note
ywheel housing
Do not continue to apply pressure after
• Mount the cover on the ywheel housing
the spring has unclipped, as this falsies
the measuring result, meaning that the
measurement has to be performed again.

• Place the Tension tester [14] (4) on the longest


point between contact points on the V-belt (3)
• Press the pressure pad (2) perpendicular to the
V-belt (3) until the spring of the Tension tester [14]
(4) unclips
• Read off the tension value at the point where the
upper edge of the indicator arm (1) intersects the
scale
• V-belt tensioning force, see Technical data, 98
• Fit a new V-belt if the V-belt tensioning force differs
from this value

102 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Checking and setting the refrigerant compressor belt track (D0836 LFL50 to LFL55)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Mounting bolt (4) Poly-V-belt pulley, crankshaft


(2) Holder (5) Guide roller
(3) Poly-V-belts (6) Poly-V-belt pulley, refrigerant compressor

Technical data
Angular offset, poly-V-belt pulley (4) to (6)................................................................................... Max. 0.5°
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M10x35-8.8 .......................................................45 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque.
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench.
Note
If the refrigerant compressor attachment has been loosened or removed, the belt track must be
re-aligned.
Checking and setting of the belt track can and must only be performed for the engine variants
D0836 LFL50 to LFL55.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 103


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Special tools

[15] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:


• Gear ratchet [16]

[16] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

[17] Straightedge 80.99605-0167

• Checking the belt track

104 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Checking the belt track Removing the engine barring gear

Attaching the engine barring gear

• Remove the Engine barring gear [15] (1) from the


ywheel housing
• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing • Mount the cover on the ywheel housing
• Mount the Engine barring gear [15] (1) on the
ywheel housing

Checking the poly-V-belt track

• Crank the engine twice in the engine's running


direction with the Engine barring gear [15] and
Gear ratchet [16]
• Check the alignment of the poly-V-belt at the
top and bottom between the poly-V-belt pulley
(2) and the refrigerant compressor (1) using the
Straightedge [17] (3)
The upper and lower crack of light must be the same.

If the cracks of light are different, the refrigerant


compressor must be adjusted, see Setting the belt
track, 106.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 105


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Adjusting the refrigerant compressor


Setting the belt track

• Undo the mounting bolts (1)


• Adjust the refrigerant compressor (3) by moving
the holder (2)
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to 45 Nm
• Re-check the belt track

106 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

ALTERNATOR
Removing and installing the alternator
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Support (3) Poly-V-belt pulley


(2) Holder (4) Alternator

Technical data
Mounting nut, poly-V-belt pulley (3)........................ M16x1.5 ............................................................80 Nm
Mounting nut, terminal B + .................................... M8 ....................................................................15 Nm
Hollow screw, coolant line ..................................... M14x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm
Union nut, coolant line .......................................... M14x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm

Service products
Loctite 2701 sealing compound .......................................................................................... 04.10160-9353

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 107


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Note
Varying alternator holders may be tted. The procedure for removal and installation is intrinsically
the same.

Special tools

[18] Special spanner 80.99603-6029

• Removing and mounting the poly-V-belt pulley in


conjunction with:
• Handle [19]

[19] Handle 08.06460-0002

• Removing and mounting the poly-V-belt pulley

108 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the alternator Disconnecting the alternator electrical


connection
Removing the poly-V-belt

• Release and pull off the compact connector (3)


• Disconnect the cable tie (2)
CAUTION
• Unscrew the terminal B+ mounting nut (1)
The poly-V-belt tensioner is under
• Free, set aside and secure the wiring harnesses
spring tension
• Brace the poly-V-belt tensioner Detaching the air compressor line
to prevent it from springing back
unintentionally

• Undo the mounting bolts (3)


• Turn the poly-V-belt tensioner (2) anti-clockwise
as far as the stop and hold it
• Remove the poly-V-belt (1)
• Carefully relieve the poly-V-belt tensioner (2)

Disconnecting the oil level sensor electrical


connection

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the fastening clamps (3)
• Detach the air compressor line (1)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (2)


• Free the wiring harness for the oil level sensor (1),
put it down to the side and secure it

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 109


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Detaching the coolant lines Removing the alternator

• Remove the fastening clamp (5)


• Unscrew the hollow screw (6) and remove it with
the sealing rings
• Unscrew the union nut for the coolant line (3)
• Unlock the plug connections (1) and (7) by
pressing the spring clip (2)
• Remove the coolant lines (3) and (4)

Removing the holder

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1) and (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (3)
• Remove the alternator (2)

Removing the holder

• Unscrew the mounting nut (3)


• Pull out the mounting bolt (2) and remove the
holder (1)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the holder (2)

110 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the support Removing the poly-V-belt pulley

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Unscrew the mounting nut (1)
• Remove the support (2) • Remove the poly-V-belt pulley (2) from the
alternator shaft (3)
Undoing the poly-V-belt pulley mounting nut

• Mount the Special spanner [18] (2) with


Handle [19] (3) on the poly-V-belt pulley mounting
nut
• Insert the splined spanner (1) into the alternator
shaft spline
• Brace the splined spanner (1) and undo the
mounting nut

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 111


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the alternator Mounting the support

Mounting the poly-V-belt pulley

• Position the support (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
• Slide the poly-V-belt pulley (2) onto the alternator
shaft (3) Mounting the holder
• Thinly apply Loctite 2701 sealing compound on the
thread and contact surface of the new mounting
nut (1)
• Screw on the new mounting nut (1)

Tightening the poly-V-belt pulley mounting nut

• Position the holder (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

• Mount the Special spanner [18] (2) with


Handle [19] (3) on the poly-V-belt pulley mounting
nut
• Insert the splined spanner (1) into the alternator
shaft spline
• Brace the splined spanner (1) and tighten the
mounting nut to 80 Nm

112 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Mounting the alternator Mounting the holder

• Position the holder (1)


• Insert the new mounting bolt (2)
• Screw on the mounting nut (3)
• Brace the mounting bolt (2) and tighten the
mounting nut (3)

Attaching the coolant lines

• Insert the alternator (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
and (3) as marked

Attaching the air compressor line

WARNING
Component damage due to loose plug
connection
• Check the coolant line plug connections
for rm seating after securing

• Attach the coolant lines (3) and (4)


• If necessary, undo the plug connections (1) and
(7) by pressing the spring clip (2), then reinsert
and secure
• Screw in the hollow screw (6) with new sealing
• Attach the air compressor line (1) rings and then tighten it to 35 Nm
• Position the fastening clamps (3) • Screw on the union nut for the coolant line (3) and
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2) then tighten it to 35 Nm
• Mount the fastening clamp (5)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 113


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Connecting the alternator electrical connection

• Route the wiring harnesses so that they are not


under tension, not kinked and there are no chang
points
• Screw on the terminal B+ mounting nut (1) and
tighten it to 15 Nm
• Insert and lock the compact connector (3)
• Secure the wiring harnesses with cable ties (2)

Connecting the oil level sensor electrical


connection

• Route the wiring harness for the oil level sensor


(1) so that it is not under tension, not kinked and
there are no chang points
• Connect the electrical connection (2)

114 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

GROSSKOPF ALTERNATOR
Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86

(1) Crankcase yoke (8) Grosskopf alternator


(2) Crankcase (9) Mounting bolt
(3) Engine mount (10) Holder
(4) Mounting bolt (11) Mounting bolt
(5) Mounting bolt (12) Mounting bolt
(6) Holder (13) Mounting bolt
(7) Bolt-on prole (14) Holder

Technical data
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x30-10.9 .......................................................30 Nm
Mounting bolt (5) .................................................. M10x25-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M10x25-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolt (12) ................................................ M10x35-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolts (11) and (13).................................. M10x30-10.9......................................................65 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 115


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

116 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the Grosskopf alternator Removing the holder

Removing the holder

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the holder (4) from the Grosskopf
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (4) alternator (2)
• Remove the holder (5) with bolt-on prole (3) from • Mark the installation position of the bolt-on proles
the Grosskopf alternator (2) (3)
• Mark the installation position of the bolt-on prole • Remove the bolt-on proles (3)
(3)
Removing the holder
Removing the Grosskopf alternator

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) (1) and (5)
• Remove the Grosskopf alternator (2) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (5)
• Remove the holder (4) and the washer (3) from
the crankcase yoke (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 117


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the Grosskopf alternator Mounting the Grosskopf alternator

Mounting the holder

• Position the Grosskopf alternator (2)


• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1)
• Position the holder (4) with the washer (3) on the • Tighten the mounting bolts (1) by hand
crankcase yoke (2)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and (5) as Mounting the holder
marked
• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to 65 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolt (5) to 65 Nm

Mounting the holder

• Position the holder (5) with the bolt-on prole (3)


as marked
• Screw in the mounting bolts (1) and (4)
• Check the alignment of the Grosskopf alternator
poly-V-belt pulleys and the crankshaft and then
• Position the bolt-on proles (3) on the Grosskopf align the Grosskopf alternator axially as necessary
alternator (2) as marked • Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to 65 Nm
• Position the holder (4) • Tighten the mounting bolts (4) to 30 Nm
• Screw in the mounting bolts (1) and tighten to 30 • Tighten the mounting bolts (2) to 65 Nm
Nm

118 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

STARTER
Removing and installing the starter

(1) Flywheel housing (3) Mounting bolt


(2) Starter (4) Mounting nut

Technical data
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M10x35-10.9......................................................45 Nm
Mounting nut (4) ................................................... M10...................................................................45 Nm
Starter, terminal B+............................................... M10x1.5 ............................................................22 Nm
Number of teeth, starter (2) ...................................................................................................................12
Nominal output, starter (2).................................................................................................. 5.0 kW at 24 V

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 119


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Special tools

[20] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:


• Gear ratchet [21]

[21] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

120 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the starter Installing the starter

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4) • Crank the engine once in the engine's running
• Unscrew the mounting nut (1) direction using the Engine barring gear [20] and
• Pull the starter (3) out of the ywheel housing (2) Gear ratchet [21] whilst checking the ywheel ring
gear for damage. Fit a new ywheel ring gear if
necessary
• Insert the starter (3) into the ywheel housing (2)
• Screw in new mounting bolts (4) and tighten to 45
Nm
• Screw on the new mounting nut (1) and tighten it
to 45 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 121


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR
Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93

(1) Bracket (3) Refrigerant compressor


(2) Holder

Important information
CAUTION
Refrigerant and refrigerant oil can damage health and the environment
• Do not let refrigerant or refrigerant oil come into contact with the skin
• Dispose of refrigerant and refrigerant oil in the correct manner
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 123


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Note
The refrigerant compressor holder and bracket may vary, but the procedure for removal and
installation is intrinsically the same.

Note
If the refrigerant compressor attachment has been loosened or removed, the belt track must be
re-aligned.
Checking and setting of the belt track can and must only be performed for the engine variants
D0836 LFL50 to LFL55, see Checking and setting the refrigerant compressor belt track (D0836
LFL50 to LFL55), 103.

Special tools

[22] Tool insert 80.99606-0610

• Screwing on and unscrewing the plug on the


pressure connection

[23] Tool insert 80.99606-0611

• Screwing on and unscrewing the plug on the


intake connection

124 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the refrigerant compressor Removing the refrigerant compressor

Plugging the refrigerant connections

• Unscrew the mounting nuts (3)


• Pull out the mounting bolts (1)
Note • Remove the refrigerant compressor (2) from the
The intake connection is marked with an bracket
S.
The pressure connection is marked with Removing the bracket
a D.

• Screw the plugs onto the refrigerant compressor


(1) refrigerant connections using Tool insert [22]
(2) / Tool insert [23] (3)

Removing the holder

• Mark the installation position of the bracket (2)


• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts
(1) in relation to the slots for the bracket (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the bracket (2)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2)


• Remove the holder (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 125


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the refrigerant compressor Mounting the holder

Mounting the bracket

• Position the holder (3)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) and (2)
• Position the bracket (2) as marked
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) as marked Removing the plugs
and then tighten them
• Check the belt track as necessary, see Checking
and setting the refrigerant compressor belt track
(D0836 LFL50 to LFL55), 103

Mounting the refrigerant compressor

• Unscrew the plugs from the refrigerant


compressor (1) using Tool insert [22] (2) / Tool
insert [23] (3)

• Position the refrigerant compressor (2) on the


bracket
• Insert the new mounting bolts (1)
• Screw on and tighten the new mounting nuts (3)

126 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

HYDRAULIC PUMP
Removing and installing the hydraulic pump
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704), see 45
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49

(1) Support (4) V-belt


(2) Hydraulic pump (5) V-belt pulley
(3) Tensioning pulley (6) Mounting nut

Technical data
Mounting nut (6) ................................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................70 Nm
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) when newly mounted ..........................................................................500 N
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) after running for longer than 10 min......................................................350 N

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 127


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Special tools

[24] Tension tester 81.66814-6001

• Checking the V-belt tension

128 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Removing the hydraulic pump Removing the V-belt pulley

Undoing the V-belt pulley mounting nut

• Unscrew the mounting nut (2)


• Pull off the V-belt pulley (1)
• Undo the mounting nut (1) • Remove the woodruff key from the hydraulic pump

Undoing the tensioning pulley mounting nut Removing the hydraulic pump

• Undo the mounting nut (1) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the hydraulic pump (2) with adapter (3)
Removing the V-belt
Removing the support

• Unscrew the tensioning bolt (1) until the V-belt (2)


has been fully relieved, or unscrew the tensioning • Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts
bolt (1) even further, as necessary (1), (2) and (4)
• Remove the V-belt (2) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1), (2) and (4)
• Remove the support (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 129


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Installing the hydraulic pump Mounting the V-belt pulley

Mounting the support

• Insert the woodruff key into the hydraulic pump


• Fit the V-belt pulley (1)
• Position the support (3) • Screw on the new mounting nut (2) and tighten it
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1), (2) and (4) by hand
as marked
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1), (2) and (4) Tensioning the V-belt

Mounting the hydraulic pump

• Put on the V-belt (2)


• Screw in the tensioning bolt (1)
• Position the hydraulic pump (2) with adapter (3)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

130 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


MOUNTED COMPONENTS

Checking the V-belt tension Tightening the V-belt pulley mounting nut

Note • Tighten the mounting nuts (1) to 70 Nm


Do not continue to apply pressure after
the spring has unclipped; this falsies the
measuring result.
The measurement must be repeated.

• Place the Tension tester [24] (4) on the longest


point between contact points on the V-belt (3)
• Press the pressure pad (2) perpendicular to the
V-belt (3) until the spring of the Tension tester [24]
(4) unclips
• Read off the tension value at the point where the
upper edge of the indicator arm (1) intersects the
scale
• Tensioning force of V-belt (3), see Technical data,
127
• Re-tension the V-belt (3) if the V-belt tensioning
force (3) differs from this value

Tightening the tensioning pulley mounting nut

• Tighten the mounting nut (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 131


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

(1) Sealing ring (5) High-pressure line


(2) Injector (6) Rail-pressure sensor
(3) Mounting bolt (7) Rail
(4) Pressure ange (8) High-pressure pump

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 133


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

INJECTORS AND RAIL


Protective sleeves, injectors and rail
Euro 4

(1) Protective sleeve, injector nozzle


81.96002-0522
(2) Mounting bolt
(3) Cap, injector feed bore 81.96002-0523
(4) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15
81.96002-0512
(5) End plug 81.96002-0521
(6) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15
81.96002-0512
(7) Cap 81.96002-0518
(8) Protective sleeve Z 18 x 15
81.96002-0555
(9) End plug 81.96002-0521
(10) End plug 81.96002-0556
(11) End plug 81.96002-0521
(12) End plug 81.96002-0521
(13) End plug 81.96002-0519
(14) End plug 81.96002-0520
(15) Storage sleeve, injector 09.81020-1000

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 135


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Euro 5 and EEV

(1) Protective sleeve 81.96002-0522 (7) End plug 81.96002-0521


(2) Mounting bolt (8) Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117
(3) Injector feed bore cap 81.96002-0523 (9) End plug 81.96002-0521
(4) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 (10) End plug 81.96002-0519
81.96002-0512 (11) End plug 81.96002-0520
(5) Protective sleeve 81.96002-0522 (12) Injector storage sleeve 09.81020-1000
(6) Protective sleeve Z 18 x 15
81.96002-0555

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
In order to ensure that the correct protective sleeve is used, the designation (e.g. Z 14 x 15) is
imprinted in the protective sleeves. This is integrated in the special tool designation (e.g. protective
sleeve, high-pressure line connection Z 14 x 15).

136 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Special tools

[25] Injector feed bore cap 81.96002-0523

• Plugging the injector feed bore

[26] Injector nozzle protective sleeve 81.96002-0522

• Plugging the injector nozzle

[27] Injector storage sleeve 09.81020-1000

• Storing the injectors

[28] End plug 81.96002-0520

• Plugging the cylinder head injector bore

[29] Protective sleeve Z 18 x 15 81.96002-0555

• Plugging the pressure limiting valve


• Plugging the rail-pressure sensor

[30] Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117

• Plugging the high-pressure lines

[31] End plug 81.96002-0521

• Plugging the high-pressure lines


• Plugging the air distributor pipe bore

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 137


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

[32] End plug 81.96002-0519

• Plugging the rail connection hole

[33] End plug 81.96002-0556

• Plugging the rail-pressure sensor bore in the rail


• Plugging the pressure limiting valve in the rail

[34] Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 81.96002-0512

• Plugging the high-pressure line connection on the


rail
• Plugging the rail connection
• Plugging the high-pressure pump high-pressure
line connection

[35] Cap 81.96002-0518

• Plugging the hollow screw connections

138 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing and installing the injectors and rail


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the wiring harness, see 29
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135

(1) Sealing washer (6) High-pressure line


(2) Injector (7) Rail-pressure sensor
(3) Mounting bolt (8) Rail
(4) Pressure ange (9) Pressure screw
(5) Return line

Technical data
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x45 ............................................. Initial torque 2 Nm
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x45 ............................................ Final torque 30 Nm
Pressure screw (9) ............................................... M22x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
Pressure screw (9) ............................................... M22x1.5 ......................................... Final torque 55 Nm
Injector cable mounting nuts.................................. Cable lug nut M4...............................................1.5 Nm
High-pressure line (6) ........................................... M14x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (6) (initial use) .......................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (6) (re-use)............................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
High-pressure line (6) ........................................... M18x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (6) (initial use) .......................... M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (6) (reuse)................................ M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
Rail-pressure sensor (7)........................................ M18x1.5 ............................................................70 Nm
Pressure limiting valve .......................................... M18x1.5 ..........................................................100 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 139


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Overow valve ..................................................... M14x1.5 ............................................................32 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Damage in the common-rail system
• All work on components of the common-rail system must be performed by specially trained
personnel only.
• The engine must be stationary for at least 5 minutes before commencing work in order to enable
depressurisation in the rail, or depressurisation must be checked by means of MAN-cats®
(desired value 0)
• Ensure absolute cleanliness in all areas when carrying out all work
• Avoid any moisture whatsoever
• Always replace rail connections once they have been undone
• Do not reuse plugs for the high-pressure lines, the rail or injectors, even if they have only been
used once
• Follow the sequence described when tightening injectors, high-pressure lines, the rail and rail
connections
WARNING
Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
• Always remove only one fuel line
• Plug the component connections immediately using new, clean protective sleeves
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[36] Adapter 80.99602-0173

• Removing the rail connection

[37] Extractor device 80.99602-0011

• Removing the rail connection in conjunction with:


• Adapter [36]

[38] Extractor device 80.99602-6015

• Extracting injectors in conjunction with:


• Knurled nut [39]
• Plate [40]
• Support [41]
• Support [42]
• Hexagon nut [43]
• Support [44]

140 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

[39] Knurled nut 80.99602-0201

• Extracting the injectors

[40] Plate 80.99602-0176

• Extracting the injectors

[41] Support 80.99602-0177

• Extracting the injectors

[42] Support 80.99602-0199

• Extracting the injectors

[43] Hexagon nut 06.11226-8306

• Extracting the injectors

[44] Support 80.99602-0198

• Extracting the injectors

[45] Socket, size 7 08.06141-0700

• Attaching the injector cable

[46] Torque screwdriver 08.06510-9026

• Mounting injector cable in conjunction with:


• Adapter [47]
• Socket, size 7 [45]

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 141


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

[47] Adapter 08.06139-9029

• Attaching the injector cable

[48] Thrust piece 80.99606-0609

• Installing the injectors

[49] Socket, size 17 80.99603-0309

• Removing and installing the high-pressure lines


in conjunction with:
• Extension [51]

[50] Socket, size 22 80.99603-0378

• Removing and installing the high-pressure lines


in conjunction with:
• Extension [51]

[51] Extension 08.06139-9025

• Removing and installing the high-pressure lines

[52] Release handle 80.99606-0597

• Opening the quick-release couplings in


conjunction with:
• Release tool, size 1 [53]
• Release tool, size 2 [54]

[53] Release tool, size 1 80.99606-0625

• Opening the quick-release couplings

[54] Release tool, size 2 80.99606-0626

• Opening the quick-release couplings

142 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the fuel lines (Euro 4 variant) Detaching the fuel return lines

Allowing the return duct to empty

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (1) and remove it with


the sealing rings (3)
• Remove the fuel return lines (2) and (5)
• Unscrew the adapter tting (4) and remove it with
the sealing ring

WARNING
Component damage due to fuel in the
combustion chamber
• Allow the return duct in the air
distributor pipe to empty before
extracting the injectors
WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the overow valve (2) with sealing rings


(1) and allow the return duct to empty
• Remove the fuel return line

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 143


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the fuel lines (Euro 5 and EEV Detaching the fuel return line on the fuel lter
variant) side

Detaching the rail-fuel service centre fuel return


line

WARNING
Component damage due to fuel in the
• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with combustion chamber
the sealing rings (1) • Allow the return duct in the air
• Detach the fuel line (3) distributor pipe to empty before
extracting the injectors
Detaching the fuel return line on the WARNING
high-pressure pump side Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (5) and remove with the


sealing rings (6) and (7)
• Pull off the fuel line (4) using the Release tool, size
2 [54] and the Release handle [52]
• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove with the
sealing rings (1) and the fuel line (3)
• Allowing the return duct to empty

WARNING
Component damage due to fuel in the
combustion chamber
• Allow the return duct in the air
distributor pipe to empty before
extracting the injectors
WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (1) with sealing rings


(2) and allow the return duct to empty
• Pull off the fuel line (3) using the Release tool, size
1 [53] and the Release handle [52]

144 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the injectors and rail Disconnecting the rail-pressure sensor


electrical connection (Euro 5 and EEV)
Detaching the high-pressure line

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


WARNING
Detaching the high-pressure lines
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Detach the high-pressure line (2) from the rail (1)


and the high-pressure pump (3) using the Socket,
size 17 [49], the Socket, size 22 [50] if necessary
and the Extension [51]

Disconnecting the rail-pressure sensor


electrical connection (Euro 4)

• Mark the installation position of the clamping


pieces (1)
• Remove the clamping pieces (1)
• Mark the installation position of the high-pressure
lines (2)
• Detach the high-pressure lines (2) using the
Socket, size 17 [49], the Socket, size 22 [50] if
necessary and the Extension [51]

• Disconnect the electrical connection (2) for the


rail-pressure sensor (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 145


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the rail Removing the cylinder head cover

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) • Open the plug bracket bayonet ttings
• Remove the rail (1) from the air distributor pipe • Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the cylinder head cover (2) from the
Unscrewing the pressure screw cylinder head (1)

Disconnecting the injector electrical connection

• Unscrew the pressure screw (2) for the rail


connection (1)
• Unscrew the mounting nuts (2)
Removing the rail connection • Remove the injector cable from the injector (1)
• Remove the plug bracket (3)

Unscrewing the pressure ange mounting bolt

• Extract the rail connection (2) from the bore


(1) using the Extractor device [37] (3) and the
Adapter [36]
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)
• Remove the spherical washer (2)

146 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Assembling the special tool Removing the injector

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrect
removal of the injector
• Always remove the relevant rail
connection before removing the injector
• Always remove one injector only

• Fitting the special tool


• Insert the Extractor device [38] into the groove for
the pressure ange
• Clamp the clamping sleeve with the Knurled
nut [39] (1)
• Extract the injector (3) from the cylinder head by
turning the Knurled nut [39] (2)
• Mount the Support [42] (2) and the Support [41] • Remove the special tool
(5) with the Hexagon nut [43] (7) on the Plate [40]
(6) Removing the injector
• Insert the Support [44] (4) into the Support [41] (5)
• Insert the Extractor device [38] (3) into the
Plate [40] (6) and screw on the Knurled nut [39]
(1)

• Remove the injector (1) with the pressure ange


(4) and the sealing washer (2)
• Pull off the O-ring (3)
• Carefully clean the injector bore

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 147


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Installing the injectors and the rail Installing the rail connection

Installing the injector

WARNING
Rail connections are pressed together
Note on the cone during installation
Always install injectors together with • Do not re-use rail connections if they
pressure ange. have already been installed
It is not possible to install the pressure
ange afterwards. • Thinly apply clean diesel fuel on a new O-ring (4)
and t it on the new rail connection (2)
• Check to ensure that the hole in the cylinder head • Slide the rail connection (2) into the bore (3) so
is clean that the balls on the rail connection (2) are located
• Do not remove the injector (1) from the Injector in the grooves in the cylinder head
storage sleeve [27] until immediately before • Screw in the pressure screw (1) and tighten to
installation Initial torque 10 Nm
• Remove the protective sleeves
• Push the pressure ange (4) onto the injector Injector nal torque
(1), ensuring that the fuel inlet opening is turned
towards the rail connection mounting hole
• Insert the injector (1) into the cylinder head with a
new O-ring (3) and a new sealing washer (2)
• Press the injector (1) fully into the cylinder head
using Thrust piece [48]

Injector initial torque

• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to Final torque 30 Nm

• Screw in the new mounting bolt (1) for the pressure


ange with the spherical washer (2)
• Tighten the mounting bolt (1) to Initial torque 2 Nm

148 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Rail connection nal torque Mounting the cylinder head cover

• Tighten the pressure screw (1) to Final torque • Check the gasket in the cylinder head cover (2)
55 Nm and the plug bracket; replace as necessary
• Fit the cylinder head cover (2) over the plug
Connecting the injector electrical connection bracket and onto the cylinder head (1)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Plug the bayonet ttings on the plug bracket

Mounting the rail

WARNING
Component damage due to possible
short-circuit
• When tightening the mounting nuts,
make sure that the cable plugs do not • Position the rail (1) on the air distributor pipe
touch each other • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

• Fit the plug bracket (3)


• Position the injector cable on the injector (1)
• Place the Socket, size 7 [45] with Adapter [47] on
the Torque screwdriver [46]
• Tighten the mounting nuts (2) to 1.5 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 149


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Fitting a new rail-pressure sensor and pressure Attaching the high-pressure lines
limiting valve

WARNING
Note Component damage due to
This work step only applies to D0836 Euro non-aligned high-pressure lines
4 engines. • After initial tightening, check the
alignment of the high-pressure lines
WARNING and, if necessary, re-align them
Component damage due to lack of
lubricant • Attach the high-pressure lines (2) to the rail and
• Do not wash off the pressure limiting rail connection as marked
valve and rail-pressure sensor as the • Tighten the high-pressure lines (2) to Initial
thread and biting edge are coated with torque 10 Nm using the Socket, size 17 [49] (3),
lubricant the Socket, size 22 [50] if necessary and the
Extension [51]
• Unscrew the rail-pressure sensor (2) and pressure • If reusing, tighten the high-pressure lines (2) to
limiting valve (1) Final torque 30° using the Socket, size 17 [49]
• Screw in the new pressure limiting valve (1) and (3), the Socket, size 22 [50] if necessary and the
tighten it to 100 Nm Extension [51]
• Screw in the new rail-pressure sensor (2) and • Tighten new high-pressure lines (2) to Final torque
tighten it to 70 Nm 60° using the Socket, size 17 [49] (3), the Socket,
size 22 [50] if necessary and the Extension [51]
• Mount the clamping pieces (1) as marked

Connecting the rail-pressure sensor electrical


connection (Euro 5 and EEV)

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

150 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Connecting the rail-pressure sensor electrical Attaching the fuel lines (Euro 4 variant)
connection (Euro 4)
Attaching the fuel return lines

• Connect the electrical connection (2) for the


rail-pressure sensor (1) • Screw in the adapter tting (4) with a new sealing
ring and then tighten it
Installing the high-pressure line • Position the fuel return lines (2) and (5)
• Fit the hollow screw (1) with new sealing rings (3),
screw in and tighten

Attaching the fuel return line

WARNING
Component damage due to
non-aligned high-pressure line
• After initial tightening, check the
alignment of the high-pressure line
and, if necessary, re-align

• Attach the high-pressure line (2) at the rail (1) and


high-pressure pump (3)
• Tighten the high-pressure line (2) to Initial torque
10 Nm using the Socket, size 17 [49], the Socket,
size 22 [50] if necessary and the Extension [51]
• If reusing, tighten the high-pressure line (2) to
Final torque 30° using the Socket, size 17 [49],
the Socket, size 22 [50] if necessary and the
Extension [51]
• Tighten a new high-pressure line (2) to Final torque
60° using the Socket, size 17 [49], the Socket, size
22 [50] if necessary and the Extension [51] • Position the fuel return line
• Screw in the overow valve (2) with new sealing
rings (1) and tighten to 32 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 151


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Attaching the fuel lines (Euro 5 and EEV Attaching the rail-fuel service centre fuel return
variant) line

Attaching the fuel return line on the fuel lter


side

• Attach the fuel line (3)


• Fit the hollow screw (2) with new sealing rings (1),
screw in and tighten
• Position the fuel line (3) with new sealing rings (1)
• Screw in the hollow screw (2) and tighten it by
hand
• Install the fuel line (4) with new sealing rings (6)
and (7)
• Screw in the hollow screw (5) and tighten it by
hand
• Check the fuel line (4) is seated rmly; if
necessary, detach and attach again using the
Release tool, size 2 [54] and the Release
handle [52]
• Tighten the hollow screws (2) and (5)

Attaching the fuel return line on the


high-pressure pump side

• Position the fuel line (3) with new sealing rings (2)
• Screw in the hollow screw (1) and tighten it by
hand
• Put the fuel line (3) on the tting on the
high-pressure pump
• Check the fuel line (3) is seated rmly; if
necessary, detach and attach again using the
Release tool, size 1 [53] and the Release
handle [52]
• Tighten the hollow screw (1)

152 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

HIGH-PRESSURE PUMP
Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3)

(1) End plug 81.96002-0521 (7) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15


(2) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 81.96002-0512
81.96002-0512 (8) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15
(3) End plug 81.96002-0521 81.96002-0512
(4) High-pressure line (9) Mounting bolt
(5) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 (10) End plug 81.96002-0521
81.96002-0512 (11) High-pressure pump
(6) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 (12) Cap 81.96002-0518
81.96002-0512 (13) End plug 81.96002-0521

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
In order to ensure that the correct protective sleeve is used, the designation (e.g. Z 14 x 15) is
imprinted in the protective sleeves. This is integrated in the special tool designation (e.g. protective
sleeve, high-pressure line connection Z 14 x 15).

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 153


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Special tools

[55] Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 81.96002-0512

• Plugging the rail high-pressure line connection


• Plugging the high-pressure pump high-pressure
line connection

[56] End plug 81.96002-0521

• Plugging the high-pressure line


• Plugging the fuel lines
• Plugging the high-pressure pump bore
• Plugging the air distributor pipe bore

[57] Cap 81.96002-0518

• Plugging the hollow screw connections

154 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3)


Additional jobs
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 153

(1) High-pressure line (4) High-pressure pump


(2) Mounting nut (5) O-ring
(3) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Fuel ll quantity for high-pressure pump (4)....................................................................................... 60 ml
Filler plug for high-pressure pump (4) ..............................................................................................18 Nm
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x40-8.8 .........................................................30 Nm
Mounting nut (2) ................................................... M8 ....................................................................30 Nm
High-pressure line (1) ........................................... M14x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (initial use) (1) .......................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (re-use) (1)............................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 155


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Important information
WARNING
Damage in the common-rail system
• All work on components of the common-rail system must be performed by specially trained
personnel only
• The engine must be stationary for at least 5 minutes before commencing work in order to enable
depressurisation in the rail, or depressurisation must be checked by means of MAN-cats®
(desired value 0)
• Ensure absolute cleanliness in all areas when carrying out all work
• Avoid any moisture whatsoever
• Do not reuse plugs for the high-pressure lines, the rail or injectors, even if they have only been
used once
WARNING
Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
• Always remove only one fuel line
• Plug the component connections immediately using new, clean protective sleeves
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[58] Socket, size 17 80.99603-0309

• Removing and installing the high-pressure line in


conjunction with:
• Extension [59]

[59] Extension 08.06139-9025

• Removing and installing the high-pressure line

[60] Removing device 80.99601-6021

• Removing the high-pressure pump in conjunction


with:
• Impact tool [61]

[61] Impact tool 80.99606-6078

• Removing the high-pressure pump

156 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the high-pressure pump Detaching the fuel return line

Disconnecting the metering unit electrical


connection

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the


metering unit (2)

Detaching the fuel return lines

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with


the sealing rings (1)
• Remove the fuel return line
WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (1) and remove it with


the sealing rings (3)
• Remove the fuel return lines (2) and (5)
• Unscrew the adapter tting (4) and remove it with
the sealing ring

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 157


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the high-pressure line Removing the high-pressure pump if


rmly seated
Detaching the fuel return lines

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Remove the high-pressure line (2) from the rail (1) • Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
and the high-pressure pump (3) using the Socket, container
size 17 [58] and the Extension [59]
• Unscrew the hollow screw (1) and remove it with
Removing the high-pressure pump the sealing rings (3)
• Remove the fuel return lines (2) and (5)
• Unscrew the adapter tting (4) and remove it with
the sealing ring

Note
When tting a new high-pressure pump,
remove and mount the high-pressure
pump drive gear, see Dismantling and
assembling the high-pressure pump
(variant CP3.3), 163.

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Unscrew the mounting nut (2)
• Pull the high-pressure pump (3) out of the timing
case

158 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the fuel return line Detaching the high-pressure line

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Remove the high-pressure line (2) from the rail (1)


and the high-pressure pump (3) using the Socket,
size 17 [58] and the Extension [59]

Unscrewing the high-pressure pump mounting


bolts

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with


the sealing rings (1)
• Remove the fuel return line

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) for the


high-pressure pump (3)
• Unscrew the mounting nut (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 159


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Mounting the special tool Installing the high-pressure pump


Filling the high-pressure pump with fuel

• Screw the threaded spindle (4) into the plate (3)


for the Removing device [60] (2) using the Impact
tool [61] (5) until ush WARNING
• Mount the Removing device [60] (2) on the Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
high-pressure pump (1) using two bolts • Ensure that no dirt can enter the pump
when lling with oil
Removing the high-pressure pump
• Do not tilt the high-pressure pump after
it has been lled

• Unscrew the ller plug (2) and remove it with the


sealing ring
• Use a pipette (1) to ll the high-pressure pump (3)
with 60 ml of clean, ltered diesel fuel
• Screw in the ller plug (2) with a new sealing ring
and tighten to 18 Nm

Installing the high-pressure pump

Note
When tting a new high-pressure pump,
remove and mount the high-pressure
pump drive gear, see Dismantling and
assembling the high-pressure pump
(variant CP3.3), 163.

• Extract the high-pressure pump (2) from the timing


case using the Removing device [60] (1)
• Remove the Removing device [60] (1) from the
high-pressure pump (2) • Insert the high-pressure pump (3) into the timing
case
• Screw in new mounting bolts (1) and tighten to 30
Nm
• Screw on the new mounting nut (2) and tighten it
to 30 Nm

160 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Installing the high-pressure line Attaching the fuel return line

WARNING
Component damage due to
non-aligned high-pressure line
• After initial tightening, check the
alignment of the high-pressure line
and, if necessary, reposition it

• Attach the high-pressure line (2) at the rail (1) and


high-pressure pump (3)
• Tighten the high-pressure line (2) to Initial torque
10 Nm using the Socket, size 17 [58] and the
Extension [59]
• If reusing, tighten the high-pressure line (2) to Final
torque 30° using the Socket, size 17 [58] and the
Extension [59] • Position the fuel return line
• Tighten the new high-pressure line (2) to Final • Screw in the hollow screw (2) with new sealing
torque 60° using the Socket, size 17 [58] and the rings (1) and then tighten it
Extension [59]
Attaching the fuel return lines

• Screw in the adapter tting (4) with a new sealing


ring and then tighten it
• Position the fuel return lines (2) and (5)
• Screw in the hollow screw (1) with new sealing
rings (3) and then tighten it

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 161


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Connecting the metering unit electrical


connection

• Connect the electrical connection (1) for the


metering unit (2)

162 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Dismantling and assembling the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3)


Additional jobs
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 153
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 155

(1) Mounting nut (5) Metering unit


(2) O-ring (6) Mounting bolt
(3) Drive gear (7) Fuel pump
(4) High-pressure pump (8) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Fuel ll quantity for high-pressure pump (4)....................................................................................... 60 ml
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M5x20 ............................................. Initial torque 4 Nm
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M5x20 ..............................................Final torque 7 Nm
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M6x1.5x36.......................................................... 8 Nm
Filler plug for high-pressure pump (4) ..............................................................................................18 Nm
Mounting nut (1) ................................................... M18x1.5-8.8 ....................................................105 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Damage in the common-rail system
• All work on components of the common-rail system must be performed by specially trained
personnel only
• Ensure absolute cleanliness in all areas when carrying out all work
• Avoid any moisture whatsoever

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 163


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[62] Three-arm puller 08.99605-9014

• Extracting the high-pressure pump drive gear

164 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Dismantling the high-pressure pump Removing the fuel pump

Unscrewing the mounting nut from the


high-pressure pump drive gear

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Pull out the fuel pump (1)
• Remove the O-rings (3) and (4) from the fuel pump
• Clean the high-pressure pump (3) and blow it dry (1)
using compressed air
• Brace the drive gear for the high-pressure pump Removing the metering unit
(3)
• Unscrew the mounting nut (1)
• Remove the O-ring (2)

Removing the high-pressure pump drive gear

• Mark the installation position of the metering unit


(2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Extract the metering unit (2) by turning slightly to
the right/left
• Extract the drive gear (2) using the Three-arm
puller [62] (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 165


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Assembling the high-pressure pump Mounting the high-pressure pump drive gear

Installing the metering unit

• Degrease the cone in the drive gear and on the


high-pressure pump (3)
Note • Place the drive gear on the cone of the
When using micro-encapsulated bolts, high-pressure pump (3)
the time between the tightening stages • Fit the new O-ring (2) on the high-pressure pump
must not be longer than 2 minutes. (3)
• Screw on the new mounting nut (1)
• Insert the new metering unit (2) into the • Brace the drive gear for the high-pressure pump
high-pressure pump by turning slightly to the (3)
right/left • Tighten the mounting nut (1) to 105 Nm
• Align the metering unit (2) as marked
Filling the high-pressure pump with fuel
• Tighten the new mounting bolts (1) to Initial torque
4 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to Final torque 7 Nm

Installing the fuel pump

WARNING
Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
• Ensure that no dirt can enter the pump
when lling with oil
• Do not tilt the high-pressure pump after
• Insert the new O-rings (3) and (4) into the fuel it has been lled
pump (1)
• Insert the fuel pump (1) • Unscrew the ller plug (2) and remove it with the
• Screw in new mounting bolts (2) and tighten to 8 sealing ring
Nm • Use a pipette (1) to ll the high-pressure pump (3)
with 60 ml of clean, ltered diesel fuel
• Screw in the ller plug (2) with a new sealing ring
and tighten to 18 Nm

166 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH)

(1) Protective sleeve Z 18 x 15 (8) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20


81.96002-0555 81.96002-0514
(2) Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117 (9) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
(3) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20 81.96002-0514
81.96002-0514 (10) Cap 81.96002-0518
(4) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20 (11) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15
81.96002-0514 81.96002-0512
(5) Cap 81.96002-0518 (12) Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15
(6) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20 81.96002-0512
81.96002-0514 (13) End plug 81.96002-0521
(7) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
81.96002-0514

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
In order to ensure that the correct protective sleeve is used, the designation (e.g. Z 14 x 15) is
imprinted in the protective sleeves. This is integrated in the special tool designation (e.g. protective
sleeve, high-pressure line connection Z 14 x 15).

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 167


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Special tools

[63] Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117

• Plugging the high-pressure line

[64] Protective sleeve Z 14 x 15 81.96002-0512

• Plugging the high-pressure pump high-pressure


line connection

[65] Protective sleeve Z 18 x 15 81.96002-0555

• Plugging the rail high-pressure line connection

[66] Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20 81.96002-0514

• Plugging the tting for the quick-release coupling

[67] End plug 81.96002-0521

• Plugging the high-pressure pump bore

[68] Cap 81.96002-0518

• Plugging the hollow screw connection

168 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH)


Additional jobs
– Tilting the cab forwards and backwards, see Operator's Manual
– Reading out the fault memory (MAN-cats®)
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 167
– Bleeding the fuel system, see Operator's Manual

(1) High-pressure line (4) High-pressure pump


(2) Mounting nut (5) O-ring
(3) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Fuel ll quantity, high-pressure pump (4)........................................................................................... 60 ml
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x40-8.8 .........................................................30 Nm
Mounting nut (2) ................................................... M8-8 .................................................................30 Nm
High-pressure line (1) ........................................... M14x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (initial use) (1) .......................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (re-use) (1)............................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
High-pressure line (1) ........................................... M18x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (initial use) (1) .......................... M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (re-use) (1)............................... M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
Mounting nut, drive gear, high-pressure pump (4)... M18x1.5-8.8 ....................................................105 Nm
Filler plug, high-pressure pump (4) ..................................................................................................18 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 169


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Important information
WARNING
Damage in the common-rail system
• All work on components of the common-rail system must be performed by specially trained
personnel only.
• The engine must be stationary for at least 5 minutes before commencing work in order to enable
depressurisation in the rail, or depressurisation must be checked by means of MAN-cats®
(desired value 0)
• Ensure absolute cleanliness in all areas when carrying out all work
• Avoid any moisture whatsoever
• Do not reuse plugs for the high-pressure lines, the rail or the injectors, even if they have only
been used once
WARNING
Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
• Always remove only one fuel line
• Plug the component connections immediately using new, clean protective sleeves
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
Mark the installation position of the fuel lines and the holders before removal.
Route and position the fuel lines and holders as marked when installing.

Special tools

[69] Socket, size 22 80.99603-0378

• Removing and installing the high-pressure line in


conjunction with:
• Socket, size 17 [70]
• Extension [71]

[70] Socket, size 17 80.99603-0309

• Removing and installing the high-pressure line

[71] Extension 08.06139-9025

• Removing and installing the high-pressure line

[72] Release handle 80.99606-0597

• Opening the quick-release couplings in


conjunction with:
• Release tool, size 1 [73]

170 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

[73] Release tool, size 1 80.99606-0625

• Opening the quick-release couplings

[74] Three-arm puller 08.99605-9014

• Extracting the high-pressure pump drive gear

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 171


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the high-pressure pump Detaching the HDP-fuel service centre fuel line

Disconnecting the metering unit electrical


connection

• Pull off the fuel line (1) using the Release tool, size
1 [73] and the Release handle [72]

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) Detaching the HDP-fuel service centre fuel lines

Detaching the fuel return line on the


high-pressure pump side

• Unscrew the hollow screw (3) and remove it with


the sealing rings (2)
• Pull off the fuel line (4) using the Release tool, size
WARNING 1 [73] and the Release handle [72]
Component damage due to fuel in the • Pull off the fuel line (1) using the Release tool, size
combustion chamber 1 [73] and the Release handle [72]
• Allow the return duct in the air
distributor pipe to empty before
extracting the injectors
WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container

• Unscrew the hollow screw (1) with sealing rings


(2) and allow the return duct to empty
• Pull off the fuel line (3) using the Release tool, size
1 [73] and the Release handle [72]

172 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the high-pressure line Retting the high-pressure pump drive


gear
Unscrewing the mounting nut from the
high-pressure pump drive gear

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
container
• Clean the high-pressure pump (3) and blow it dry
• Detach the high-pressure line (2) from the rail (1) using compressed air
and the high-pressure pump (3) using the Socket, • Brace the drive gear for the high-pressure pump
size 17 [70], the Socket, size 22 [69] and the (3)
Extension [71] • Unscrew the mounting nut (1)
• Remove the washer (2)
Removing the high-pressure pump
Removing the high-pressure pump drive gear

Note • Extract the drive gear (2) using the Three-arm


When tting a new high-pressure pump, puller [74] (1)
ret the high-pressure pump drive gear,
see Retting the high-pressure pump
drive gear, 173.

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Unscrew the mounting nut (2)
• Remove the high-pressure pump (3) from the
timing case

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 173


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Mounting the high-pressure pump drive gear Installing the high-pressure pump
Filling the high-pressure pump with fuel

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrect
cleaning agent WARNING
• Only use white spirit, spirit, glycol Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
alcohol or isopropanol to clean the cone • Ensure that no dirt can enter the pump
when lling with oil
• Degrease the cone in the drive gear and on the • Do not tilt the high-pressure pump after
high-pressure pump (3) it has been lled
• Put the drive gear on the cone of the high-pressure
pump (3) • Unscrew the ller plug (2) and remove it with the
• Put a new washer (2) on the high-pressure pump sealing ring
(3) • Use a pipette (1) to ll the high-pressure pump (3)
• Screw on the new mounting nut (1) with 60 ml of clean, ltered diesel fuel
• Brace the drive gear for the high-pressure pump • Screw in the ller plug (2) with a new sealing ring
(3) and tighten to 18 Nm
• Tighten the mounting nut (1) to 105 Nm
Installing the high-pressure pump

• Insert the high-pressure pump (3) into the timing


case by turning slightly to the right/left
• Screw on a new mounting nut (2) and tighten to
30 Nm
• Screw in new mounting bolts (1) and tighten to 30
Nm

174 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Installing the high-pressure line Attaching the HDP-fuel service centre fuel lines

• Put the fuel line (1) on the tting on the


WARNING
high-pressure pump and fuel service centre
Component damage due to
• Check the fuel line (1) is seated rmly; if
non-aligned high-pressure line
necessary, detach and attach again using the
• After initial tightening, check the
Release tool, size 1 [73] and the Release
alignment of the high-pressure line
handle [72]
and, if necessary, re-align
• Put the fuel line (4) on the tting on the
high-pressure pump
• Attach the high-pressure line (2) at the rail (1) and
• Check for rm seating of the fuel line (4), if
high-pressure pump (3)
necessary detach and attach again using the
• Tighten the high-pressure line (2) to Initial torque
Release tool, size 1 [73] and the Release
10 Nm using the Socket, size 17 [70], the Socket,
handle [72]
size 22 [69] and the Extension [71]
• Fit the hollow screw (3) with new sealing rings (2),
• If reusing the high-pressure line (2), tighten to
screw in and tighten
Final torque 30° using the Socket, size 17 [70],
the Socket, size 22 [69] and the Extension [71] Attaching the HDP-fuel service centre fuel line
• Tighten a new high-pressure line (2) to Final torque
60° using the Socket, size 17 [70], the Socket, size
22 [69] and the Extension [71]

• Put the fuel line (1) on the tting on the


high-pressure pump and fuel service centre
• Check the fuel line (1) is seated rmly; if
necessary, detach and attach again using the
Release tool, size 1 [73] and the Release
handle [72]

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 175


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Attaching the fuel return line on the


high-pressure pump side

• Position the fuel line (3) with new sealing rings (2)
• Screw in the hollow screw (1) and tighten by hand
• Put the fuel line (3) on the tting on the
high-pressure pump
• Check the fuel line (3) is seated rmly; if
necessary, detach and attach again using the
Release tool, size 1 [73] and the Release
handle [72]
• Tighten the hollow screw (1)

Connecting the metering unit electrical


connection

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

176 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

FUEL SERVICE CENTRE


Protective sleeves, fuel service centre
Euro 4

(1) Cap 81.96002-0517


(2) End plug 81.96002-0521
(3) Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117
(4) End plug 81.96002-0521
(5) Cap 81.96002-0518
(6) Protective sleeves Z 30 x 22
81.96002-0515
(7) Cap 81.96002-0518
(8) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
81.96002-0514
(9) Cap 81.96002-0518
(10) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
81.96002-0514
(11) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
81.96002-0514
(12) Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 177


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Euro 5 and EEV

(1) End plug 81.96002-0521 (9) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20


(2) End plug 81.96002-0521 81.96002-0514
(3) Cap 81.96002-0518 (10) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
(4) Protective sleeve Z 30 x 22 81.96002-0514
81.96002-0515 (11) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
(5) Cap 81.96002-0518 81.96002-0514
(6) Caps 81.96002-0518 (12) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20
(7) Protective sleeve Z 30 x 22 81.96002-0514
81.96002-0515 (13) Cap 81.96002-0518
(8) Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20 (14) Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117
81.96002-0514

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
In order to ensure that the correct protective sleeve is used, the designation (e.g. Z 14 x 15) is
imprinted in the protective sleeves. This is integrated in the special tool designation (e.g. protective
sleeve, high-pressure line connection Z 14 x 15).

178 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Special tools

[75] Protective sleeve Z 12 x 16 81.96002-0117

• Plugging the tting for the quick-release coupling

[76] Protective sleeve Z 28 x 20 81.96002-0514

• Plugging the quick-release couplings

[77] Protective sleeve Z 30 x 22 81.96002-0515

• Plugging the quick-release couplings

[78] Cap 81.96002-0517

• Plugging the hollow screw connections

[79] Cap 81.96002-0518

• Plugging the hollow screw connections

[80] End plug 81.96002-0521

• Plugging the hand pump connections


• Plugging the fuel service centre bores

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 179


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing and installing the fuel service centre


Additional jobs
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177

(1) Air distributor pipe (4) Mounting bolt


(2) Hand pump (5) Pressure sensor
(3) Fuel service centre

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
WARNING
Danger of damage due to dirt ingress
• Always remove only one fuel line
• Plug the component connections immediately using new, clean protective sleeves
WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect any remaining fuel that emerges in a suitable container

180 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Special tools

[81] Release handle 80.99606-0597

• Opening the quick-release couplings in


conjunction with:
• Release tool, size 1 [82]
• Release tool, size 2 [83]

[82] Release tool, size 1 80.99606-0625

• Opening the quick-release couplings

[83] Release tool, size 2 80.99606-0626

• Opening the quick-release couplings

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 181


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the fuel lines (Euro 4 variant) Detaching the fuel lines

Detaching the fuel lines

• Unscrew the hollow screws (3) and (5) and remove


with the sealing rings (4)
• Unscrew the hollow screws (3) and (6) and remove • Detach the fuel lines (1) and (2)
with the sealing rings (2) • Pull off the fuel line (6) with the Release tool, size
• Detach the fuel lines (1) and (7) 1 [82] (7) and the Release handle [81]
• Pull off the fuel line (4) with the Release tool, size
1 [82] (5) and the Release handle [81]

Detaching the fuel lines

• Unscrew the hollow screw (3) and remove it with


the sealing rings (2)
• Detach the fuel line (1)
• Pull off the fuel line (5) with the Release tool, size
1 [82] (4) and the Release handle [81]

182 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Detaching the fuel lines (Euro 5 and EEV Detaching the fuel return line on the fuel lter
variant) side

Detaching the fuel lines

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Unscrew the hollow screw (3) and remove it with
• Collect emerging fuel in a permissible
the sealing rings (2)
container
• Pull off the fuel line (4) using the Release tool, size
2 [83] and the Release handle [81] • Unscrew the hollow screw (5) and remove with the
• Remove the fuel line (1) sealing rings (6) and (7)
• Unscrew the hollow screw (5) and remove it with • Pull off the fuel line (4) using the Release tool, size
the sealing rings (6) 2 [83] and the Release handle [81]
• Pull off the fuel line (7) using the Release tool, size • Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove with the
1 [82] and the Release handle [81] sealing rings (1) and the fuel line (3)
Detaching the fuel lines Detaching the fuel line

• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with • Pull off the fuel line (1) using the Release tool, size
the sealing rings (1) 1 [82] and the Release handle [81]
• Undo the hose clamp and remove the fuel line (3)
• Pull off the fuel line (4) using the Release tool, size
1 [82] and the Release handle [81]

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 183


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the fuel service centre Removing the proportional valve

Disconnecting the fuel service centre electrical


connections

• Disconnect the electrical connection for the


proportional valve (2)
• Detach the compressed-air line (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)
• Remove the proportional valve (2)

Removing the fuel service centre

• Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical


connection (1)
• Disconnect the heating element electrical
connection (3)
• Disconnect the cable tie (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)
Disconnecting the proportional valve electrical
• Remove the fuel service centre (1)
connection
Removing the holder

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the


proportional valve (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (2)
• Free the wiring harness (3) for the proportional
• Remove the holder (1)
valve (2)

184 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Installing the fuel service centre Connecting the proportional valve electrical
connection
Mounting the holder

• Connect the electrical connection (1) for the


• Position the holder (1) proportional valve (2)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (2) • Route the wiring harness (3) so it is not under
tension, not kinked and there are no chang points
Mounting the fuel service centre
Connecting the fuel service centre electrical
connections

• Position the fuel service centre (1)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

Mounting the proportional valve

• Connect the pressure sensor electrical connection


(1)
• Connect the heating element electrical connection
• Position the proportional valve (2) (3)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (1) • Route the wiring harnesses so that they are not
• Attach the compressed-air line (3) under tension, not kinked, and there are no chang
• Connect the electrical connection for the points
proportional valve (2) • Secure the wiring harnesses with cable ties (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 185


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Attaching the fuel lines (Euro 4 variant) Attaching the fuel lines

Attaching the fuel lines

• Position the fuel lines (1) and (7)


• Fit the hollow screws (3) and (6) with new sealing
• Position the fuel lines (1) and (2) rings (2), screw in and tighten
• Fit the hollow screws (3) and (5) with new sealing • Attach the fuel line (4)
rings (4), screw in and tighten • Check that the fuel line (4) is seated rmly. Pull off
• Attach the fuel line (6) and re-attach using the Release tool, size 1 [82]
• Check that the fuel line (6) is seated rmly. Pull off (5) and the Release handle [81] if necessary
and re-attach using the Release tool, size 1 [82]
(7) and the Release handle [81] if necessary

Attaching the fuel lines

• Position the fuel line (1)


• Fit the hollow screw (3) with new sealing rings (2),
screw in and tighten
• Attach the fuel line (5)
• Check that the fuel line (5) is seated rmly. Pull off
and re-attach using the Release tool, size 1 [82]
(4) and the Release handle [81] if necessary

186 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Attaching the fuel lines (Euro 5 and EEV Attaching the fuel lines
variant)
Attaching the fuel line

• Put the fuel line (4) on the tting on the


high-pressure pump and the fuel service centre
• Check that the fuel line (4) is seated rmly. If
• Put the fuel line (1) on the tting on the necessary, pull off and re-attach using the Release
high-pressure pump and the fuel service centre tool, size 1 [82] and the Release handle [81]
• Check that the fuel line (1) is seated rmly. If • Put the fuel line (3) with the hose clamp on the
necessary, pull off and re-attach using the Release tting on the rail
tool, size 1 [82] and the Release handle [81] • Screw in the hollow screw (2) with new sealing
rings (1) and then tighten it
Attaching the fuel return line on the fuel lter • Tighten the hose clamp for the fuel line (3)
side
Attaching the fuel lines

• Position the fuel line (3) with new sealing rings (1)
• Screw in the hollow screw (2) and tighten it by • Put the fuel line (4) on the tting
hand • Check that the fuel line (4) is seated rmly. If
• Install the fuel line (4) with new sealing rings (6) necessary, pull off and re-attach using the Release
and (7) tool, size 2 [83] and the Release handle [81]
• Screw in the hollow screw (5) and tighten it by • Position the fuel line (1) on the fuel service centre
hand • Screw in the hollow screw (3) with new sealing
• Check the fuel line (4) is seated rmly; if rings (2) and then tighten it
necessary, detach and attach again using the • Put the fuel line (7) on the tting on the
Release tool, size 2 [83] and the Release high-pressure pump
handle [81] • Check that the fuel line (7) is seated rmly. If
• Tighten the hollow screws (2) and (5) necessary, pull off and re-attach using the Release
tool, size 1 [82] and the Release handle [81]
• Screw in the hollow screw (5) with new sealing
rings (6) and then tighten it

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 187


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Dismantling and assembling the fuel service centre


Additional jobs
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180

(1) Fuel lter (9) Heating element


(2) Cover (10) Hollow screw
(3) Sealing ring (11) Cover
(4) Housing (12) Fuel pre-lter
(5) Pressure sensor (13) Sealing ring
(6) Water drain plug (14) Housing
(7) Mounting bolt (15) Hand pump
(8) Sealing ring (16) Mounting bolts

Technical data
Pressure sensor (5) .............................................. M18x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm
Cover (11) ......................................................................................................................................10 Nm
Cover (2)........................................................................................................................................20 Nm
Water drain plug (6) ......................................................................................................................... 3 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Dirt can cause failure of the common-rail system
• Always allow the fuel service centre to empty before changing the fuel lter
• Only use fuel lters that are designated for common-rail systems and marked as such
• Do not reuse old lter elements.

188 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[84] Socket, size 36 80.99603-0325

• Removing and installing the fuel lter cover

[85] Socket, size 19 08.06141-9061

• Removing and installing the fuel pre-lter cover

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 189


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Disassembling the fuel service centre Removing the pressure sensor

Allowing the fuel service centre to empty

• Unscrew the pressure sensor (1) with sealing ring


(2)
WARNING
Removing the fuel lter
Danger of environmental pollution
• Collect any remaining fuel that emerges
in a suitable container

• Undo the cover (1) by approx. 2 - 3 turns using


the Socket, size 36 [84]
• Open the water drain plug (2) and allow the fuel
service centre to empty
• Re-tighten the water drain plug (2) to 3 Nm

Removing the heating element

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Pull the heating element (3) and sealing ring (4)
out of the fuel service centre (1)

• Unscrew the cover (1) with Socket, size 36 [84]


• Pull the cover (1) with fuel lter (3) out of the fuel
service centre housing
• Remove the sealing ring (2)
• Unscrew the cover (7) with Socket, size 19 [85]
• Pull the fuel pre-lter (6) out of the hand pump
housing (4)
• Remove the sealing ring (5)

190 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the hand pump housing Assembling the fuel service centre
Mounting the hand pump housing

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) from the fuel


service centre (3)
• Remove the hand pump housing (1) • Position the hand pump housing (1) on the fuel
service centre (3)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 191


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Installing the fuel lter Tightening the fuel lter cover

• Tighten the fuel lter cover to 20 Nm using the


Socket, size 36 [84] (1)

Installing the pressure sensor

• Moisten the new sealing ring (5) with clean diesel


fuel
• Fit the sealing ring (5) on the hand pump housing
(4)
• Insert a new fuel pre-lter (6)
• Screw on the cover (7) and tighten by hand • Screw in the pressure sensor (1) with a new
• Insert the new fuel lter (3) into the cover (1) sealing ring (2)
• Moisten the new sealing ring (2) with clean diesel • Tighten the pressure sensor (1) to 45 Nm
fuel
• Screw in the cover (1) with sealing ring (2) and Installing the heating element
tighten by hand

Tightening the fuel pre-lter cover

• Insert the heating element (3) with new sealing


ring (4) into the fuel service centre (1)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)
• Tighten the fuel lter cover to 10 Nm using the
Socket, size 19 [85] (1)

192 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

FLAME START SYSTEM


Protective sleeves, ame start system

(1) End plug 81.96002-0521 (4) Protective sleeve A9 81.96002-0516


(2) Cap 81.96002-0518 (5) Cap 81.96002-0517
(3) Protective sleeve Z 10 x 10 81.96002-0511

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
In order to ensure that the correct protective sleeve is used, the designation (e.g. Z 14 x 15) is
imprinted in the protective sleeves. This is integrated in the special tool designation (e.g. protective
sleeve, high-pressure line connection Z 14 x 15).

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 193


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Special tools

[86] Protective sleeve Z 10 x 10 80.96002-0511

• Plugging the ame glow plug connection

[87] Protective sleeve A9 81.96002-0516

• Plugging the ame start system fuel line

[88] Cap 81.96002-0517

• Plugging the ame start system fuel line hollow


screw connection
• Plugging the solenoid valve fuel line hollow screw
connection

[89] Cap 81.96002-0518

• Plugging the fuel service centre fuel line hollow


screw connection

[90] End plug 81.96002-0521

• Plugging the solenoid valve bore


• Plugging the fuel service centre bore

194 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing and installing the ame start system


Additional jobs
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193

(1) Flame glow plug (3) Fuel line


(2) Solenoid valve

Technical data
Mounting nut, cable lug......................................... M5 ..................................................................... 5 Nm
Flame glow plug (1) .............................................. M20x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Union nuts, fuel line (3) ......................................... M10x1 ...............................................................10 Nm

Service products
Curil T sealing compound .................................................................................................. 04.90300-9030

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 195


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the ame start system Removing the solenoid valve

Disconnecting the electrical connection

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the solenoid valve (2)
• Unscrew the cable lug mounting nut
• Remove the electrical connection (1) Removing the ame glow plug

Detaching the ame start system fuel lines

• Undo the mounting nut (1)


• Unscrew the ame glow plug (2)

• Disconnect the electrical connection (2)


• Remove the fuel lines (1) and (3)

196 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Installing the ame start system Attaching the ame start system fuel lines

Installing the ame glow plug

• Thinly apply Curil T sealing compound on the


thread of the ame glow plug (2)
• Screw in the ame glow plug (2) and line it up with
the solenoid valve - ame glow plug (2) fuel line
• Brace the ame glow plug (2) and tighten the
mounting nut (1) to 25 Nm

Mounting the solenoid valve

• Connect the electrical connection (2)


• Position the fuel line (1)
• Screw in the hollow screw with new sealing rings
• Tighten the union nut for the fuel line (1) to 10 Nm
• Tighten the hollow screw for the fuel line (1)
• Attach the fuel line (3) with new sealing rings

Connecting the electrical connection

• Position the solenoid valve (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

• Position the electrical connection (1) at the ame


glow plug
• Screw on the cable lug mounting nut and tighten
to 5 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 197


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL UNIT


Removing and installing the engine control unit

(1) Rubber mount (4) Mounting bolt


(2) Bracket (5) Engine control unit
(3) Rubber mount (6) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M6x35-10.9 ....................................................... 11 Nm
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-10.9 .......................................................13 Nm

Service products
Loctite 270 sealing compound ............................................................................................ 04.10160-9131

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
After the engine is installed, the engine control unit must have its parameters reset and the fault
memory must be deleted.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 199


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Removing the engine control unit Installing the engine control unit
Disconnecting the engine control unit electrical Tightening sequence for engine control unit
connections

• Follow the illustrated tightening sequence A to H


• Release and pull off the connectors (1), (2) and (3) for the mounting bolts (1) in the following work step
• Free the wiring harnesses
Mounting the engine control unit and bracket
Removing the engine control unit and bracket

• Insert the rubber mounts (1) and (2) into the


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (5) bracket
• Remove the engine control unit (4) • Thinly apply Loctite 270 sealing compound on the
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) thread of the new mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the bracket with rubber mounts (1) and • Position the bracket
(2) • Screw in the mounting bolts (3) and tighten them
to 13 Nm
• Position the engine control unit (4)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (5) and tighten in
the specied sequence to 11 Nm

200 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


COMMON-RAIL SYSTEM

Connecting the engine control unit electrical


connections

WARNING
Danger of irreparable engine control
unit damage
• When installing the connectors, rst
fully open the lock and then insert and
lock the connectors

• Insert and lock the connectors (1), (2) and (3) in


the engine control unit
• Route the wiring harnesses and secure using
cable ties

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 201


TURBOCHARGING

TURBOCHARGING

(1) Air distributor pipe (7) Oil pressure line


(2) Charge-air manifold (8) Oil feed distributor block
(3) Turbocharger (9) Oil return line
(4) Heat shield (10) Oil pressure line
(5) Compressed-air line (11) Heat shield
(6) Pulse valve (12) Charge-air manifold

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 203


TURBOCHARGING

INTERCOOLER
Removing and installing the intercooler

(1) Mounting bolt (5) Intercooler


(2) Holder (6) O-ring
(3) Mounting bolt (7) Unscrewed conduit
(4) Mounting bolt (8) Unscrewed conduit

Service products
Radiator antifreeze ............................................................................................................ 09.21001-0002

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 205


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the intercooler Installing the intercooler


Removing the holder Mounting the intercooler

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (3)


Note
• Remove the holder (2)
Aluminium unscrewed conduits may be
Removing the intercooler installed, depending on the production
period. In this case, the unscrewed
conduits can be reused; however, new
O-rings must be tted before installation.

• Thinly apply Radiator antifreeze on the new


unscrewed conduits
• Insert the unscrewed conduits into the charge-air
manifold
• Insert the new O-rings (2)
• Put the intercooler (1) with absorber mat over the
unscrewed conduits and support it
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts

Mounting the holder

• Unscrew the mounting bolts


• Remove the intercooler (1) with the absorber mat
• Remove the O-rings (2)
• Pull the unscrewed conduits out of the charge-air
manifolds

• Position the holder (2)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) and (3)

206 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

CHARGE-AIR PIPES/CHARGE-AIR MANIFOLD


Removing and installing the charge-air pipes/charge-air manifold (Euro 5 and EEV
variant)

(1) Charge-air pipe


(2) Clamp
(3) Charge-air manifold
(4) Clamp
(5) Charge-air manifold

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 207


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the charge-air pipes Removing the upper charge-air manifold holder
/charge-air manifold
Removing the suction line

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1) and (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2)
• Undo the jubilee clip (1) using the Hose clamp • Remove the holder (3)
pliers for jubilee clips [92] and push it onto the
suction line (4) Removing the charge-pressure sensor
• Undo the jubilee clip (3) using the Hose clamp
pliers for jubilee clips [92] and push it onto the
hose
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (5) and remove it with
the bush (2)
• Remove the suction line (4)

Removing the lower charge-air manifold holder

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) and remove the
charge-pressure sensor

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (3)


• Remove the holder (2)

208 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the charge-air manifold Removing the charge-air manifold for the
low-pressure turbocharger

• Remove the clamp (2)


• Remove the charge-air manifold (1) with O-ring (3)

• Remove the charge-air manifold (1)


• Pull the O-ring (2) off the turbocharger
• Remove the unscrewed conduit (3)

Detaching the charge-air pipe

• Remove the clamp (1)


• Unscrew the mounting bolt (3)
• Remove the charge-air pipe (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 209


TURBOCHARGING

Installing the charge-air pipes Mounting the charge-air manifold


/charge-air manifold
Installing the charge-air manifold for the
low-pressure turbocharger

• Position the charge-air manifold (1) with the clamp


(2) and a new O-ring (3)
• Tighten the clamp (2) to 6 Nm
• Install the low-pressure-side intercooler, see
Removing and installing the intercooler, 205

Attaching the charge-air pipe

Note
An aluminium unscrewed conduit may be
installed, depending on the production
period. In this case, the unscrewed
conduit can be reused; however, new
O-rings must be tted before installation.

• Thinly apply Radiator antifreeze on the new


unscrewed conduit (3)
• Insert the unscrewed conduit (3) into the
intercooler
• Position the charge-air pipe (2) with the clamp (1) • Insert the charge-air manifold (1) with a new O-ring
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (3) (2)
• Tighten the clamp (1)

210 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Mounting the charge-pressure sensor Installing the suction line

• Insert the charge-pressure sensor with a new • Install the suction line (4)
O-ring • Screw in the mounting bolt (5) with the bush (2)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (2) and then tighten it
• Connect the electrical connection (1) • Install the jubilee clips (1) and (3) using the Hose
clamp pliers for jubilee clips [92]
Mounting the upper charge-air manifold holder

• Position the holder (3)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) and
(2) as marked

Mounting the lower charge-air manifold holder

• Position the holder (2)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) and (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 211


TURBOCHARGING

TURBOCHARGER
Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409

(1) Turbocharger (9) Oil return line


(2) Gasket (10) Holder
(3) Oil pressure line (11) O-ring
(4) Gasket (12) Exhaust manifold
(5) Elbow tting (13) Mounting bolt
(6) Threaded connection (14) Heat shield
(7) Sealing ring (15) Mounting nut
(8) Gasket

Service products
Technical Vaseline ............................................................................................................. 09.15014-0017

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 213


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the turbocharger Removing the exhaust manifold

Removing the charge-air pipe

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the exhaust manifold (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)
• Undo the hose clamp (3) Removing the intake tting
• Pull off the charge-air pipe (2)

Removing the charge-air manifold

• Undo the clamp (1)


• Pull off the intake tting (2)

• Detach the hose (1) Detaching the oil pressure line


• Undo the clamp (4)
• Remove the charge-air manifold (2) with O-ring (3)

Removing the exhaust manifold heat shield

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the oil pressure line (1) with the gasket
(3)
• Unscrew the threaded connection (4) and remove
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) it with the sealing ring (5)
• Remove the heat shield (1) • Clean the mating faces

214 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Detaching the oil return line Installing the turbocharger


Mounting the turbocharger

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) and (4)


• Remove the oil return line (2) with the gasket (1),
holder (5) and O-Ring (6) • Fit the turbocharger (2) with a new gasket (3)
• Clean the mating faces • Screw on and tighten the new mounting nuts (1)

Removing the turbocharger Attaching the oil return line

• Unscrew the mounting nuts (1) • Thinly apply clean engine oil on a new O-ring (6)
• Remove the turbocharger (2) with gasket (3) and t it on the oil return line (2)
• Clean the mating faces • Insert the oil return line (2) with holder (5) into the
crankcase yoke
• Fit the oil return line (2) with a new gasket (1) and
position it on the turbocharger
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3) and (4)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 215


TURBOCHARGING

Filling the turbocharger with oil Mounting the intake tting

• Push on the intake tting (2) with the hose clamp


WARNING
(1)
If no oil is added, the turbocharger
• Tighten the hose clamp (1)
will be damaged when the vehicle is
started for the rst time Mounting the exhaust manifold
• Fill the turbocharger with clean engine
oil before attaching the oil pressure line

• Use a funnel (1) to pour clean engine oil into the


oil feed neck on the turbocharger (2) until the oil
duct in the turbocharger (2) is full

Attaching the oil pressure line

• Position the exhaust manifold (1)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (2)

Mounting the exhaust manifold heat shield

• Screw in the threaded connection (4) with a new


sealing ring (5) and tighten
• Fit the oil pressure line (1) with a new gasket (3)
and position it
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) and tighten
them by hand
• Screw on and tighten the elbow tting for the oil
pressure line (1)
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2)

• Position the heat shield (1)


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (2)

216 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Mounting the charge-air manifold

• Thinly apply Technical Vaseline on a new O-ring


(3) and insert it into the charge-air manifold (2)
• Position the charge-air manifold (2) with the clamp
(4)
• Tighten the clamp (4)
• Attach the hose (1)

Installing the charge-air pipe

• Insert the charge-air pipe (2) with the hose clamp


(3)
• Tighten the hose clamp (3)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 217


TURBOCHARGING

Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without
intercooler)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411

(1) Intake pipe (7) Oil pressure line


(2) Charge-air manifold (8) Oil feed distributor block
(3) Turbocharger (9) Oil return line
(4) Heat shield (10) Oil pressure line
(5) Compressed-air line (11) Heat shield
(6) Pulse valve (12) Charge-air manifold

Technical data
Clamp for charge-air manifold (2) ..................................................................................................... 7 Nm
Exhaust manifold clamp ................................................................................................................... 7 Nm

Service products
Technical Vaseline ............................................................................................................. 09.15014-0017

218 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
The actual charge pressure and opening pressure of the wastegate valve can only be interrogated
using the EDC electronic control unit. The turbocharger must be replaced if the specied values
are not reached.
Replace the turbocharger if the wastegate valve is defective.

Special tools

[91] Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips 80.99625-0073

• Removing and installing jubilee clips

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 219


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the turbocharger Removing the charge-air manifold

Removing the holder

• Mark the installation position of the charge-air


manifold (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) • Undo the clamp (3)
• Remove the holder (1) • Remove the charge-air manifold (1) with O-ring (2)

Detaching the intake pipe Removing the heat shield

• Undo the jubilee clips (3) using Hose clamp pliers • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (3)
for jubilee clips [91] and push onto the intake pipe • Remove the heat shield (2)
(1)
• Undo the jubilee clip (2) using Hose clamp pliers Removing the heat shield
for jubilee clips [91] and push onto the intake
manifold
• Remove the intake pipe (1)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the heat shield (1)

220 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the charge-air manifold Detaching the oil pressure lines

• Undo the clamp (3)


• Remove the charge-air manifold (1) with O-ring (2)
from the turbocharger

Removing the intake tting

• Unscrew the hollow screw (1) and remove it with


the sealing rings
• Detach the oil pressure lines (4) and (5)
• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with
the sealing rings
• Remove the distributor block for the oil feed (3)
• Undo the hose clamp (1)
• Pull off the intake tting (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 221


TURBOCHARGING

Detaching the oil return lines Removing the exhaust manifold

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the heat shield (2)
• Mark the installation position of the exhaust
manifold (3)
• Undo the clamp (4)
• Remove the exhaust manifold (3)

Removing the heat shields

• Undo the jubilee clips (2) using Hose clamp pliers


for jubilee clips [91]
• Detach the oil return lines (1) and (6) with seals (7)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (5)
• Remove the holder (4)
• Pull the connecting piece (3) with O-ring out of the
crankcase yoke
• Clean the mating faces

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2)


• Remove the heat shields (3), (4) and (5) from the
exhaust manifold

222 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the pulse valve Removing the turbocharger

• Undo the hose clamps (3) • Unscrew the mounting nuts (1)
• Pull off the hoses (1) and (2) • Pull the turbocharger (2) with gasket (3) over the
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (7) stay bolt
• Remove the pulse valve (4) • Clean the mating faces
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (6)
• Remove the holder (5)

Removing the holder

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(2) and (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) and (3)
• Remove the holder (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 223


TURBOCHARGING

Installing the turbocharger Mounting the pulse valve

Mounting the turbocharger

• Position the holder (5)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (6)
• Place the turbocharger (2) with new gasket (3) • Position the pulse valve (4)
over the stay bolt • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (7)
• Screw on and tighten the new mounting nuts (1) • Push on the hoses (1) and (2) with hose clamps
(3)
Mounting the holder • Tighten the hose clamps (3)

Mounting the heat shields

• Position the holder (1)


• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) and (3) as
marked • Position the heat shields (3), (4) and (5) on the
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) and (3) exhaust manifold
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
and (2)

224 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Mounting the exhaust manifold Attaching the oil return lines

• Position the exhaust manifold (3) with the clamp


(4) as marked
• Tighten the clamp (4) to 7 Nm
• Position the heat shield (2)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on a new O-ring and


t it on the connecting piece (3)
• Insert the connecting piece (3) into the crankcase
yoke
• Attach the oil return lines (1) and (6) with new seals
(7)
• Position the holder (4)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolt (5)
• Mount the jubilee clips (2) with the Hose clamp
pliers for jubilee clips [91]

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 225


TURBOCHARGING

Filling the turbocharger with oil Attaching the oil pressure lines

WARNING
If no oil is added, the turbocharger
will be damaged when the vehicle is
started for the rst time
• Fill the turbocharger with clean engine
oil before attaching the oil pressure
lines

• Use a funnel (1) to pour clean engine oil into the


oil feed neck on the turbocharger until the oil duct
in the turbocharger is full

• Position the distributor block for the oil feed (3)


• Screw in the hollow screw (2) with new sealing
rings
• Position the oil pressure line (5)
• Screw in the hollow screw (1) with new sealing
rings
• Position the oil pressure line (4)
• Screw on and tighten the union nuts for the oil
pressure lines (4) and (5)
• Tighten the hollow screws (1) and (2)

Mounting the intake tting

• Push on the intake tting (2) with hose clamp (1)


• Tighten the hose clamp (1)

226 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Mounting the charge-air manifold Installing the charge-air manifold

• Thinly apply Technical Vaseline on a new O-ring • Thinly apply Technical Vaseline on a new O-ring
(2) (2)
• Position the charge-air manifold (1) with O-ring (2) • Position the charge-air manifold (1) with O-ring (2)
on the turbocharger and clamp (3) as marked
• Position the clamp (3) and tighten to 7 Nm • Tighten the clamp (3)

Mounting the heat shield Mounting the intake pipe

• Position the heat shield (1) • Position the intake pipe (1)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2) • Mount the jubilee clip (2) with the Hose clamp
pliers for jubilee clips [91]
Mounting the heat shield • Mount the jubilee clip (3) with the Hose clamp
pliers for jubilee clips [91]

• Position the heat shield (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
and (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 227


TURBOCHARGING

Mounting the holder

• Position the holder (1)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

228 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging with
intercooler)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the charge-air pipes/charge-air manifold (Euro 5 and EEV variant), see 207
– Removing and installing the intercooler, see 205

(1) Intake tting (7) Oil return line


(2) Hose clamp (8) Oil return line
(3) Oil pressure line (9) Holder
(4) Clamp (10) Heat shield
(5) Exhaust manifold (11) Heat shield
(6) Oil pressure line (12) Heat shield

Technical data
Clamp (4)............................................................. M6x50 ................................................................ 7 Nm
Clamps, charge-air manifold.................................. M6x50 ................................................................ 6 Nm

Service products
Radiator antifreeze ............................................................................................................ 09.21001-0002

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 229


TURBOCHARGING

WARNING
Danger of environmental pollution
• Use a suitable container to collect any engine oil which emerges

Note
The actual charge pressure and opening pressure of the wastegate valve can only be interrogated
using the EDC electronic control unit. The turbocharger must be replaced if the specied values
are not reached.
Replace the turbocharger if the wastegate valve is defective.

Special tools

[92] Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips 80.99625-0073

• Removing and installing jubilee clips

230 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the turbocharger Removing the heat shield

Detaching the oil separator vent line

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the heat shield (1)
• Undo the jubilee clip (1) using the Hose clamp
pliers for jubilee clips [92] and push it onto the Removing the heat shield
vent line (2)
• Undo the jubilee clip at the intake tting using the
Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips [92] and push it
onto the hose
• Remove the vent line (2)

Removing the intake tting

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the heat shield (2)

• Mark the installation position of the intake tting


(1)
• Undo the hose clamp (2)
• Pull off the intake tting (1) with the hose clamp (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 231


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the heat shield Removing the exhaust manifold

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Undo the clamp (2)


• Remove the heat shield (2) • Remove the exhaust manifold (3) over the
projection (1)

232 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Detaching the oil pressure line Detaching the oil pressure line

• Unscrew the union nuts (1) and (3) • Unscrew the union nuts (1) and (3)
• Detach the oil pressure line (2) • Detach the oil pressure line (2)

Detaching the oil return line

• Unscrew the union nut (1)


• Unscrew the mounting bolt (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)
• Remove the oil return line (2) with the gasket (5)
• Clean the mating faces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 233


TURBOCHARGING

Detaching the oil return line Removing the turbocharger

• Unscrew the hollow screw (4) and remove it with • Unscrew the mounting nuts (1) and (3)
the sealing rings (1) and (5) • Unscrew the mounting bolt (4)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) • Pull off the turbocharger (2) with gasket over the
• Remove the oil return line (2) with the gasket stay bolts
• Clean the mating faces • Clean the mating faces

Detaching the wastegate hose Removing the holder

• Undo the clamp (1) • Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts
• Pull the hose (2) off the wastegate (2) and (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) and (3)
• Remove the holder (1)

234 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Installing the turbocharger Attaching the wastegate hose

Mounting the holder

• Fit the hose (2) on the wastegate


• Tighten the hose clamp (1)
• Position the holder (1)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) and (3) as Attaching the oil return line
marked
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) and (3)

Mounting the turbocharger

• Position the oil return line (2) with a new gasket


• Screw in the mounting bolts (3) and tighten them
by hand
• Screw in the hollow screw (4) with new sealing
• Put on the turbocharger (2) with a new gasket over rings (1) and (5) and then tighten it
the stay bolts • Tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Screw in the new mounting bolt (4)
• Screw on and tighten the new mounting nuts (1)
and (3)
• Tighten the mounting bolt (4)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 235


TURBOCHARGING

Attaching the oil return line Attaching the oil pressure line

• Install the oil return line (2) with a new gasket (5)
• Screw in the mounting bolts (4) and tighten them
by hand
• Screw in the mounting bolt (3) and tighten it by
hand
• Tighten the mounting bolts (3) and (4)
• Tighten the union nut (1)

Filling the turbocharger with oil

• Attach the oil pressure line (2)


• Screw on and tighten the union nuts (1) and (3)

WARNING
If no oil is added, the turbocharger
will be damaged when the vehicle is
started for the rst time
• Fill the turbocharger with clean engine
oil before attaching the oil pressure
lines

• Use a funnel (1) to pour clean engine oil into the


oil feed neck on the turbocharger until the oil duct
in the turbocharger is full

236 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Attaching the oil pressure line Mounting the exhaust manifold

• Attach the oil pressure line (2) • Position the exhaust manifold (3) with the clamp
• Screw on and tighten the union nuts (1) and (3) (2) over the projection (1)
• Tighten the clamp (2) to 7 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 237


TURBOCHARGING

Mounting the heat shield Mounting the heat shield

• Position the heat shield (1)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

Mounting the intake tting

• Position the heat shield (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

Mounting the heat shield

• Push on the intake tting (1) with the hose


clamp (2)
• Align the intake tting (1) as marked
• Tighten the hose clamp (2)

Attaching the oil separator vent line

• Position the heat shield (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

• Insert the vent line (2)


• Install the jubilee clip at the intake tting using the
Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips [92]
• Install the jubilee clip (1) using the Hose clamp
pliers for jubilee clips [92]

238 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TURBOCHARGING

Removing the control valve Installing the control valve


Disconnecting the control valve electrical Installing the control valve
connection

• Position the control valve (5)


• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) • Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (4)
• Put on the hose (1) and tighten the hose clamps
Removing the control valve • Put on the hose (2) and tighten the hose clamp (3)

Connecting the control valve electrical


connection

• Undo the hose clamp (3) and pull off the hose (2)
• Undo the hose clamps and pull off the hose (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)
• Remove the control valve (5) • Connect the electrical connection (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 239


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

(1) Exhaust manifold (4) Air distributor pipe


(2) EGR positioning cylinder (5) Charge-air manifold
(3) EGR module (6) Gasket

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 241


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

AIR DISTRIBUTOR PIPE


Removing and installing the air distributor pipe
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the wiring harness, see 29
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135
– Removing and installing the injectors and rail, see 139
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195

(1) Gasket (3) Charge-air manifold


(2) Temperature sensor

Technical data
Temperature sensor (2)......................................... M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm

Service products
Renolit Si 704 silicone grease ............................................................................................ 09.15014-0102
Radiator antifreeze ............................................................................................................ 09.21001-0002

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 243


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

244 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the air distributor pipe Removing the charge-pressure sensor

Detaching the hose

• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with


the sealing rings
• Lay the hose (1) to the side

Removing the heater feed holder

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) and remove the
charge-pressure sensor (2)

Removing the charge-air manifold (Euro 4)

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the charge-air manifold (4) with gasket
(2)
• Pull the unscrewed conduit (3) out of the
non-return valve housing
• Clean the mating faces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 245


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the charge-air manifold (Euro 5 and Detaching the air distributor pipe
EEV)

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) (3), (4) and (5)
• Remove the charge-air manifold (4) with gasket • Unscrew the mounting bolts (3), (4) and (5)
(2) • Remove the air distributor pipe (2) with gaskets (1)
• Remove the O-ring (3) from the EGR module • Clean the mating faces
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the temperature sensor

• Disconnect the electrical connection for the


temperature sensor (2)
• Unscrew the temperature sensor (2) and remove
with the sealing ring (1)

246 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Installing the air distributor pipe Mounting the charge-air manifold (Euro 5 and
EEV)
Attaching the air distributor pipe

• Thinly apply Radiator antifreeze on a new O-ring


• Position the air distributor pipe (2) with new (3)
gaskets (1) • Fit the O-ring (3) on the EGR module
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (3), (4) and (5) • Fit the charge-air manifold (4) with a new gasket
as marked and tighten by hand (2) and position it
• Tighten the mounting bolts (3), (4) and (5) • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

Installing the temperature sensor Mounting the charge-air manifold (Euro 4)

• Screw in the temperature sensor (2) with a new • Thinly apply Renolit Si 704 silicone grease on the
sealing ring (1) and tighten to 45 Nm new unscrewed conduit (3)
• Connect the electrical connection for the • Insert the unscrewed conduit (3) into the
temperature sensor (2) non-return valve housing
• Fit the charge-air manifold (4) with a new gasket
(2) and position it
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 247


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Mounting the charge-pressure sensor Attaching the hose

• Position the hose (1)


• Screw in the hollow screw (2) with new sealing
rings and then tighten it

• Insert the charge-pressure sensor (2) with a new


O-ring
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Connect the electrical connection (1)

Removing the heater feed holder

• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (1)

248 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

EGR MODULE
Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195

(1) Gasket (5) Exhaust manifold


(2) Mounting bolt (6) EGR module
(3) Shut-off valve (7) Non-return valve housing
(4) EGR positioning cylinder

Technical data
Temperature sensor, EGR module (6).................... M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm
Mounting nut, EGR positioning cylinder (4) ............ M8 ....................................................................16 Nm
Preload, EGR positioning cylinder (4) ................................................................................ 1.25 ± 0.25 mm

Service products
Renolit Si 704 silicone grease ............................................................................................ 09.15014-0102

Important information
WARNING
Danger of engine damage due to water being sucked in
• Do not open the tube cluster in the EGR module

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 249


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[93] Locating pin 80.99605-0197

• Setting the EGR positioning cylinder preload in


conjunction with:
• Dial gauge holder [95]

[94] Dial gauge 08.71000-3217

• Setting the EGR positioning cylinder preload

[95] Dial gauge holder 08.71082-0005

• Setting the EGR positioning cylinder preload

250 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the EGR module Detaching the hose

Removing the shut-off valve

• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with


the sealing rings
• Detach the EGR positioning cylinder • Set aside the hose (1)
compressed-air line
• Disconnect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical Removing the heater feed holder
connection
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) and (4)
• Remove the shut-off valve (2) with seal (5) from
the exhaust manifolds (1) and (6)
• Clean the mating faces

Dismantling the shut-off valve

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)

• Unscrew the mounting nut (3)


• Unclip the ball head device (1)
• Remove the EGR positioning cylinder (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (7)
• Remove the connecting pipe (5) with seal (4) from
the shut-off valve (6)
• Clean the mating faces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 251


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the charge pressure sensor Removing the EGR module

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the EGR module (3) with seals (1)
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the non-return valves

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) and remove the
charge pressure sensor (2)

Removing the charge-air manifold

WARNING
Danger of engine damage due to water
being sucked in
• Do not open the tube cluster in the EGR
module

• Pull the unscrewed conduit (3) out of the


non-return valve housing (1)
• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts
(2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)
• Remove the non-return valve housing (1) with
non-return valves (4) and seal (5) from the EGR
module housing (6)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Clean the mating faces
• Remove the charge-air manifold (4) with gasket
(2)
• Pull the unscrewed conduit (3) out of the
non-return valve housing
• Clean the mating faces

252 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the temperature sensor Installing the EGR module


Installing the temperature sensor

• Unscrew the temperature sensor (2) with sealing


ring (1)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the thread of the
temperature sensor (2)
• Screw in the temperature sensor (2) with a new
sealing ring (1) and tighten to 45 Nm

Installing the non-return valves

WARNING
Risk of exhaust gas recirculation
malfunction and non-return valve
damage
• Take care not to damage the rubber
coating on the non-return valves when
inserting into the housing
Note
The non-return valves must always be
installed in the through-ow direction.

• Carefully insert the non-return valves (4) into the


non-return valve housing (1)
• Position the non-return valve housing (1) with a
new seal (5) on the EGR module housing (6)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) as marked
and then tighten them
• Insert the unscrewed conduit (3) into the
non-return valve housing (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 253


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Mounting the EGR module Mounting the charge pressure sensor

• Put on the EGR module (3) with new seals (1)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)

Mounting the charge-air manifold

• Insert the charge pressure sensor (2) with a new


O-ring
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Connect the electrical connection (1)

• Thinly apply Renolit Si 704 silicone grease on the Removing the heater feed holder
new unscrewed conduit (3)
• Insert the unscrewed conduit (3) into the
non-return valve housing
• Fit the charge-air manifold (4) with a new gasket
(2) and position it
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (1)

254 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Attaching the hose Mounting the shut-off valve

• Position the hose (1) • Position the shut-off valve (2) with a new seal (5)
• Screw in the hollow screw (2) with new sealing on the exhaust manifolds (1) and (6)
rings and tighten • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (3)
and (4)
Assembling the shut-off valve • Connect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical
connection
• Attach the EGR positioning cylinder
compressed-air line

Setting the EGR positioning cylinder

• Position the connecting pipe (5) on the shut-off


valve (6) with a new seal (4)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (7)
• Fit the EGR positioning cylinder (2) and clip in a
new ball head device (1)
• Screw on a new mounting nut (3) and tighten to • Fit the Dial gauge holder [95] (1) with Dial
16 Nm gauge [94] (2) and Locating pin [93] on the
shut-off valve
• Fit the Locating pin [93] on the EGR positioning
cylinder with a preload
• Undo the mounting nut (3)
• Unscrew the cylinder rod by several turns
• Screw in the cylinder rod until the pointer on the
Dial gauge [94] (2) no longer moves
• Turn the cylinder rod one turn further
• Tighten the mounting nut (3)
The permitted preload on the EGR positioning
cylinder is 1.25 ± 0.25 mm.

If the preload is out of tolerance, repeat the work


step.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 255


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 5 and EEV variant)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57

(1) Gasket (5) Exhaust manifold


(2) Mounting bolt (6) EGR module
(3) EGR positioning cylinder (7) Non-return valve housing
(4) Shut-off valve

Technical data
Mounting bolts, shut-off valve (4) ........................... M8x80 ...............................................................27 Nm
Mounting bolts, shut-off valve (4) ........................... M8x18 ...............................................................27 Nm
Temperature sensor, EGR module (6).................... M16x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Bulkhead tting..................................................... M15x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm
Preload, EGR positioning cylinder (3) .......................................................................................1 + 0.5 mm

Service products
Radiator antifreeze ............................................................................................................ 09.21001-0002

Important information
WARNING
Danger of engine damage due to water being sucked in
• Do not open the tube cluster in the EGR module

256 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[96] Dial gauge 08.71000-3217

• Setting the EGR positioning cylinder preload in


conjunction with:
• Dial gauge holder [97]
• Locating pin [98]

[97] Dial gauge holder 08.71082-0005

• Setting the EGR positioning cylinder preload

[98] Locating pin 80.99605-0197

• Setting the EGR positioning cylinder preload

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 257


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the EGR module Disconnecting the EGR module temperature


sensor electrical connection
Removing the shut-off valve

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


• Detach the EGR positioning cylinder
compressed-air line Removing the cable duct cover
• Disconnect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical
connection
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (6)
• Remove the shut-off valve (2) with the gasket (3)
from the EGR module (4) and the exhaust line (5)
• Clean the mating faces

Disconnecting the air distributor pipe


temperature sensor electrical connection

• Open the locking pin (1) a quarter turn


• Remove the cable duct cover (2)

Disconnecting the plug bracket electrical


connections

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)

• Disconnect the electrical connections (1)

258 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the cable duct Removing the charge-pressure sensor

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove, set aside and secure the cable duct (2)

Detaching the hose

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1)


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) and remove the
charge-pressure sensor (2)

Removing the charge-air manifold


• Unscrew the hollow screw (2) and remove it with
the sealing rings
• Set aside the hose (1)

Removing the heater feed holder

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the charge-air manifold (4) with gasket
(2)
• Remove the O-ring (3) from the EGR module
• Clean the mating faces
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 259


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the EGR module Removing the temperature sensor

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) • Unscrew the temperature sensor (2) with sealing
• Remove the EGR module (3) with gaskets (1) ring (1)
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the non-return valves

WARNING
Danger of engine damage due to water
being sucked in
• Do not open the tube cluster in the EGR
module

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(5)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (5)
• Remove the non-return valve housing (1) with
non-return valves (2) and gasket (3) from the EGR
module housing (4)
• Clean the mating faces

260 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Dismantling the shut-off valve Assembling the shut-off valve

• Unscrew the mounting nuts (1) and (2) • Position the EGR positioning cylinder at the
• Remove the EGR positioning cylinder from the shut-off valve (3)
shut-off valve (3) • Screw on and tighten the new mounting nuts (1)
and (2)
• Set the EGR positioning cylinder, see Setting the
EGR positioning cylinder, 265

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 261


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Installing the EGR module Mounting the EGR module

Installing the temperature sensor

• Put on the EGR module (3) with new gaskets (1)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the thread of the
temperature sensor (2) Mounting the charge-air manifold
• Screw in the temperature sensor (2) with a new
sealing ring (1) and tighten to 47 Nm, oiled

Installing the non-return valves

• Thinly apply Radiator antifreeze on a new O-ring


(3)
• Fit the O-ring (3) on the EGR module
• Position the charge-air manifold (4) with a new
WARNING gasket (2)
Risk of exhaust gas recirculation • Screw in and tighten new mounting bolts (1)
malfunction and non-return valve
damage
• Take care not to damage the rubber
coating on the non-return valves when
inserting into the housing
Note
The non-return valves must always be
installed in the through-ow direction.

• Carefully insert the non-return valves (2) into the


non-return valve housing (1)
• Position the non-return valve housing (1) with a
new gasket (3) on the EGR module housing (4)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (5) as marked
and then tighten them

262 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Mounting the charge pressure sensor Attaching the hose

• Position the hose (1)


• Screw in the hollow screw (2) with new sealing
rings and tighten

Mounting the cable duct

• Insert the charge pressure sensor (2) with a new


O-ring
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Connect the electrical connection (1)

Mounting the heater feed holder


• Position the cable duct (2) on the cylinder head
cover
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

Connecting the plug bracket electrical


connections

• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (1)

• Connect the electrical connections (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 263


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Mounting the cable duct cover Mounting the shut-off valve

• Put on the cable duct cover (2) • Position the shut-off valve (2) with a new gasket
• Close the locking pin (1) a quarter turn (3) on the EGR module (4) and the exhaust line
(5)
Connecting the EGR module temperature sensor • Screw in new mounting bolts (1) and tighten to 27
electrical connection Nm
• Screw in a new mounting bolt (6) and tighten it to
27 Nm
• Connect the EGR positioning cylinder electrical
connection
• Attach the EGR positioning cylinder
compressed-air line

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

Connecting the air distributor pipe temperature


sensor electrical connection

• Connect the electrical connection (1)

264 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Setting the EGR positioning cylinder

• Fit the Dial gauge holder [97] (3) with the Dial
gauge [96] (2) and the Locating pin [98] on the
shut-off valve
• Place the Locating pin [98] on the EGR positioning
cylinder with a preload
• Undo the mounting nut (1)
• Unscrew the cylinder rod by several turns
• Screw in the cylinder rod until the pointer on the
Dial gauge [96] (2) no longer moves
• Turn the cylinder rod one turn further
• Tighten the mounting nut (1)
The permissible AGR positioning cylinder preload is
1 + 0.5 mm.

If the preload is out of tolerance, repeat the work


step.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 265


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging), see 213
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218

(1) connecting pipe (6) Gasket


(2) Mounting bolt (7) Exhaust manifold front
(3) Gasket (8) Mounting bolt
(4) Mounting bolt (9) Mounting bolt
(5) Exhaust manifold rear (10) Exhaust manifold centre

Technical data
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M8x40-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M8x40-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M8x40-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 267


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm


Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolts, shut-off valve ................................ M8x80-GA .........................................................27 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

268 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the exhaust manifold Disassembling the exhaust manifold

Removing the connecting pipe

• Remove the exhaust manifold sections (1) and (3)


from exhaust manifold section (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) • Remove the multi-piece rings (4) from exhaust
• Remove the connecting pipe (1) with gaskets (3) manifold sections (1) and (2)
• Clean the mating faces • Clean the mating faces

Removing the exhaust manifold

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2)
• Remove the exhaust manifold (3) with gaskets (5)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 269


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Installing the exhaust manifold Attaching the connecting pipe

Assembling the exhaust manifold

• Fit the connecting pipe (1) with new gaskets (3)


and position it
• Insert new multi-piece rings (4) into exhaust • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (2)
manifold sections (1) and (2)
• Insert exhaust manifold sections (1) and (3) into
exhaust manifold section (2)

Mounting the exhaust manifold

WARNING
Component damage due to leaking
exhaust manifold
• Do not reuse exhaust manifold
mounting bolts that have already been
used

• Fit the exhaust manifold (3) with new gaskets (5)


and position it
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and (2) and
tighten by hand
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to Initial
torque 25 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) to Initial torque 25
Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to 2nd torque 45°
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) to 2nd torque 45°
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to Final torque 45°
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) to Final torque 45°
• Screw in new mounting bolts (4) and tighten to 27
Nm

270 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 5 and EEV variant)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging with intercooler), see 229

(1) Exhaust line (8) Mounting bolt


(2) Gasket (9) Exhaust manifold centre
(3) Gasket (10) Multi-piece rings
(4) Gasket (11) Exhaust manifold rear
(5) Exhaust manifold front (12) Mounting bolt
(6) Multi-piece rings (13) Mounting bolt
(7) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Mounting bolt (7), (12) .......................................... M8x40-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (7), (12) .......................................... M8x40-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (7), (12) .......................................... M8x40-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-SD ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-SD ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-SD ...........................................Final torque 45°

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 271


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

272 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Removing the exhaust manifold Dismantling the exhaust manifold

Removing the heat shields

• Pull the exhaust manifold (3) out of the exhaust


manifold (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3) • Pull the exhaust manifold (2) out of the exhaust
• Remove the crane hook lug (4) manifold (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Remove the multi-piece rings (4) from exhaust
• Remove the heat shield (2) manifolds (2) and (3)
• Repeat the same procedure for the other heat • Clean the mating faces
shield

Removing the exhaust manifold

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(2) and (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) and (3)
• Remove the exhaust manifold with the gaskets (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 273


INTAKE / EXHAUST SYSTEM

Installing the exhaust manifold Mounting the heat shields

Assembling the exhaust manifold

• Position the heat shield (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
• Mount the new multi-piece rings (4) on the exhaust • Repeat the same procedure for the other heat
manifolds (2) and (3) shield
• Line up the gaps of the multi-piece rings (4) at 90° • Position the crane hook lug (4)
offset to one another • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (3)
• Insert the exhaust manifold (2) into the exhaust
manifold (1)
• Insert the exhaust manifold (3) into the exhaust
manifold (2)

Mounting the exhaust manifold

WARNING
Exhaust system leaks
• Note the gap of the gaskets

• Position the exhaust manifold with new gaskets


(1)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) and (3) and
tighten them by hand as marked
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) and (3) to Initial
torque 25 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) and (3) to 2nd
torque 45°
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) and (3) to Final
torque 45°

274 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

CYLINDER HEAD

(1) Cylinder head (5) Cylinder head cover


(2) Push rod (6) Rocker arm mechanism
(3) Exhaust valve bridge (7) Intake valve bridge
(4) Mounting bolt

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 275


CYLINDER HEAD

ROCKER ARM MECHANISM


Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism
Additional jobs
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292

(1) Cylinder head (5) Cylinder head cover


(2) Push rod (6) Rocker arm mechanism
(3) Valve bridge, exhaust valve (7) Valve bridge, intake valve
(4) Mounting bolt

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 277


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing the rocker arm mechanism Removing the rocker arm mechanism

Removing the cable duct cover

Note
Do not unscrew the mounting bolt for the
• Open the locking pin (1) a quarter turn
rocker arm shaft in order to remove the
• Remove the cable duct cover (2)
rocker arm mechanism.
Disconnecting the plug bracket electrical
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)
connection
• Remove the rocker arm mechanism (1)

• Disconnect the electrical connections (1) for the


plug brackets

Removing the cylinder head cover

• Open the plug bracket bayonet ttings


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the cylinder head cover (2) from the
cylinder head (1)

278 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Installing the rocker arm mechanism Connecting the plug bracket electrical
connections
Installing the rocker arm mechanism

• Connect the plug bracket electrical connections


• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the ball cups of (1)
the push rods
• Fit the rocker arm mechanism (1) onto the cylinder Mounting the cable duct cover
head and align it whilst inserting the adjusting
screw balls for the rocker arms into the push rod
• Screw in the mounting bolts (2) and tighten them
crosswise

Mounting the cylinder head cover

• Put on the cable duct cover (2)


• Close the locking pin (1) a quarter turn

• Check the gasket in the cylinder head cover (2)


and the plug bracket; replace as necessary
• Fit the cylinder head cover (2) over the plug
bracket and onto the cylinder head (1)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Plug the plug bracket bayonet ttings

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 279


CYLINDER HEAD

Dismantling and assembling the rocker arm mechanism


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism, see 277
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292

(1) Exhaust valve rocker arm (9) Thrust washer


(2) Exhaust valve adjusting screw (10) Pressure spring
(3) Thrust washer (11) Thrust washer
(4) Pressure spring (12) Intake valve rocker arm
(5) Thrust washer (13) Rocker arm shaft
(6) Intake valve adjusting screw (14) Rocker arm bracket
(7) Intake valve rocker arm (15) Mounting bolt
(8) Exhaust valve rocker arm

Technical data
Inside diameter, rocker arms (1), (7), (8), (12) ............................................................. 28.000 - 28.021 mm
Outside diameter, rocker arm shaft (13) ...................................................................... 27.957 - 27.970 mm
Inside diameter, rocker arm bracket (14) ..................................................................... 27.985 - 28.006 mm

Service products
White T assembly paste..................................................................................................... 09.16012-0117

280 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[99] Installer 80.99617-0143

• Removing the rocker arm shaft

[100] Micrometer, 25-50 mm 08.71200-9002

• Checking the rocker arm shaft

[101] Dial gauge 08.71000-3217

• Checking the rocker arm inside diameter


• Checking the rocker arm bracket inside diameter

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 281


CYLINDER HEAD

Dismantling the rocker arm mechanism Checking the rocker arm mechanism
Checking the rocker arm shaft outside diameter

• Mark the installation position of the rocker arms (1)


and (5), thrust washers (2) and (4) and pressure
spring (3) • Clean the rocker arm shaft (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (8) • Check the diameter of the rocker arm shaft (1)
• Press the rocker arm shaft (6) out of the rocker using the Micrometer, 25-50 mm [100] (2)
arm bracket (7) with the Installer [99] and leave The permissible diameter of the rocker arm shaft (1)
the Installer [99] in the rocker arm bracket (7) is 27.957 - 27.970 mm.
• Slowly pull the Installer [99] out of the rocker arm
If the diameter is out of tolerance, t a new rocker
bracket (7) whilst removing the rocker arms (1)
arm shaft (1), rocker arm and rocker arm bracket.
and (5), thrust washers (2) and (4) and pressure
spring (3)

282 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Checking the rocker arm inside diameter Checking the rocker arm bracket inside diameter

• Clean the rocker arm bracket (2)


• Check the inside diameter of the rocker arm
bracket (2) using the Dial gauge [101] (1)
The permissible diameter of the rocker arm bracket
pin (2) is 27.985 - 28.006 mm.

If the diameter is out of tolerance, t a new rocker


arm shaft, rocker arm and rocker arm bracket (2).

• Clean the rocker arm (2)


• Check the inside diameter of the rocker arm (2)
using the Dial gauge [101] (1)
The permissible diameter of the rocker arm (2) is
28.000 - 28.021 mm.

If the diameter is out of tolerance, t a new rocker


arm shaft, rocker arm (2) and rocker arm bracket.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 283


CYLINDER HEAD

Assembling the rocker arm mechanism

• Insert the rocker arms (1) and (5) into the rocker
arm bracket (7) as marked
• Insert the thrust washers (2) and (4) with pressure
spring (3) into the rocker arm bracket (7) as
marked
• Thinly apply White T assembly paste on the rocker
arm shaft (6)
• Align the rocker arm shaft (6) with the bore for the
mounting bolt (8)
• Insert the rocker arm shaft (6) into the rocker arm
bracket (7)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (8)

284 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

CYLINDER HEAD
Removing and installing the cylinder head
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the wiring harness, see 29
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant), see 249
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging), see 213
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant), see 267
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135
– Removing and installing the injectors and rail, see 139
– Removing and installing the air distributor pipe, see 243
– Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism, see 277
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 285


CYLINDER HEAD

(1) Cylinder head (5) Cylinder head cover


(2) Push rod (6) Rocker arm mechanism
(3) Valve bridge, exhaust valve (7) Valve bridge, intake valve
(4) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)..................................... Initial torque 80 Nm
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)......................................2nd torque 150 Nm
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)............................................. 3rd torque 90°
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)............................................. 4th torque 90°
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)...........................................Final torque 90°

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

286 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Special tools

[102] Eye-bolt M8 80.99606-0660

• Removing and mounting the cylinder head

[103] Socket, size 22 80.99612-0024

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts in


conjunction with:
• Socket, size 22 [103]
• Socket [105]
• Support [106]
• Torque angle gauge [107]
• Stop pin [108]
• Pan head screw [109]
• Connecting pin [110]
• Rubber ring 42 mm [111]
• Washer [112]
[104] Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 80.99619-0006

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[105] Socket 80.99612-0023

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[106] Support 80.99606-0551

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[107] Torque angle gauge 80.99607-0172

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[108] Stop pin 80.99606-0585

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 287


CYLINDER HEAD

[109] Pan head screw 06.02191-0407

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[110] Connecting pin 06.22729-0006

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[111] Rubber ring 42 mm 08.06142-9006

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

[112] Washer 80.99609-0033

• Undoing and tightening the cylinder head bolts

288 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing the cylinder head Undoing the cylinder head bolts

Removing the valve bridges and push rods

• Fit the special tool (1) on the cylinder head bolt to


be undone with the Socket [105] (2x)
• Mark the installation position of the valve bridges • Unscrew all the cylinder head bolts using the
(2) and (3) special tool (1)
• Remove the valve bridges (2) and (3)
• Pull out the push rods (1) Removing the cylinder head

Assembling the special tool

• Unscrew the cylinder head bolts (2)


• Screw in and tighten the Eye-bolt M8 [102] (4x) at
• Insert the Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 [104] (1) into the corners of the cylinder head (1)
the Support [106] (2) • Lift off the cylinder head (1) using the lifting device
• Fit the Stop pin [108] (5) with Pan head screw [109] • Clean the mating faces
(4) and Washer [112] (3) on the Support [106] (2) • Unscrew the Eye-bolt M8 [102] (4x)
• Place the Torque angle gauge [107] (9) onto the
Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 [104] (1)
• Place the Socket, size 22 [103] (7) onto the Torque
multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 [104] (1) and secure with
the Connecting pin [110] (8) and Rubber ring 42
mm [111] (6)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 289


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing the cylinder head gaskets Installing the cylinder head


Fitting the cylinder head gaskets

• Remove the cylinder head gaskets (2) over the


alignment pins (1)
• Clean the mating face • Place the new cylinder head gaskets (2) over the
• Clean the tapped holes for the cylinder head bolts alignment pins (1)

Mounting the cylinder head

WARNING
Component damage due to leaking
cylinder head gasket
• Do not reuse old cylinder head bolts,
even if they have only been used once

• Screw in and tighten the Eye-bolt M8 [102] (4x) at


the corners of the cylinder head (1)
• Place the cylinder head (1) onto the crankcase
using the lifting device
• Unscrew the Eye-bolt M8 [102] (4x)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the contact
surfaces of the new cylinder head bolts (2)
• Screw in the cylinder head bolts (2) and tighten
them by hand

290 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Tightening sequence for cylinder head Installing the valve bridges and push rods

• Follow the illustrated tightening sequence 1 to 24 • Thinly apply clean engine oil on the balls of the
in the following work step push rods (1)
• Insert the push rods (1) into the ball cups of the
Tightening the cylinder head bolts tappets
• Fit the valve bridges (2) and (3) as marked

Note
Note the ratio: Torque multiplier i = 1 :
3.3 [104].

• Fit the special tool (1) on the cylinder head bolt to


be tightened with Socket [105] (2x)
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts to Initial torque 80
Nm, in the correct sequence, with special tool (1)
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 2nd torque 150
Nm, in the correct sequence, with special tool (1)
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 3rd torque 90°,
in the correct sequence, with special tool (1)
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 4th torque 90°,
in the correct sequence, with special tool (1)
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts to Final torque 90°,
in the correct sequence, with special tool (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 291


CYLINDER HEAD

Checking and setting the valve clearance

(1) Valve bridge, intake valve (4) Adjuster screw, exhaust valve
(2) Valve bridge, exhaust valve (5) Adjuster screw, intake valve
(3) EVB adjusting screw

Technical data
Lock nuts, adjusting screws (3), (4), (5).................. M10x1-8.8 .........................................................40 Nm
Intake valve clearance ................................................................................................................ 0.50 mm
Exhaust valve clearance ............................................................................................................. 0.50 mm
EVB brace adjustment dimension ................................................................................................ 0.35 mm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
The valve clearance values for the intake and exhaust valve for engines with and without EVB are
the same.
The checking and setting procedure for engines without EVB is intrinsically the same.

292 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Special tools

[113] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:


• Gear ratchet [114]

[114] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

[115] Holding device 08.75300-0000

• Checking and setting the valve clearance in


conjunction with:
• Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 [117]
• Checking and setting the EVB clearance in
conjunction with:
• Feeler gauge leaf 0.35 [116]
[116] Feeler gauge leaf 0.35 80.99607-0175

• Checking and setting the EVB clearance

[117] Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 80.99607-0177

• Checking and setting the valve clearance

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 293


CYLINDER HEAD

Checking and setting the valve Attaching the engine barring gear
clearance
Removing the cable duct cover

• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing


• Mount the Engine barring gear [113] (1) on the
ywheel housing
• Open the locking pin (1) a quarter turn
• Remove the cable duct cover (2) Moving the engine to the adjusting position

Disconnecting the plug bracket electrical


connections

A Rocker arms in overlap


B Rocker arms free

• Disconnect the electrical connections (1) • Crank the engine in the engine's running direction
using the Engine barring gear [113] and the Gear
Removing the cylinder head cover ratchet [114] until the rocker arms are in overlap
• Adjust free rocker arms as per table

• Open the bayonet ttings on the plug bracket


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the cylinder head cover (2) from the
cylinder head (1)

294 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Checking the intake valve clearance Checking the exhaust valve clearance

• Insert the Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (2) with the • Insert the Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (2) with the
Holding device [115] (3) between the rocker arm Holding device [115] (3) between the rocker arm
(1) and the valve bridge (4) (1) and the valve bridge (4)
Adjust the valve clearance if the valve clearance is Adjust the valve clearance if the valve clearance is
not 0.50 mm. not 0.50 mm.

Setting the intake valve clearance Moving the EVB piston to the adjusting position

• Undo the lock nut (1) and adjusting screw (2) WARNING
• Insert the Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (4) with the Danger of incorrect valve clearance
Holding device [115] (5) between the rocker arm • It must be possible to fully push the EVB
(3) and the valve bridge (6) piston into the valve bridge
• Screw in the adjusting screw (2) until the Feeler
gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (4) can be moved between Note
the rocker arm (3) and the valve bridge (6) with This procedure only needs to be
little resistance performed in the case of engines with
• Brace the adjusting screw (2) and tighten the lock EVB.
nut (1) to 40 Nm
• Check the setting again and, if necessary, repeat • Undo the lock nut (2) and unscrew it several turns
the setting procedure • Screw in the adjusting screw (3) to press the valve
bridge downwards several times until the stop is
reached
All the engine oil must escape from the EVB piston
(1).

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 295


CYLINDER HEAD

Setting the exhaust valve clearance Checking the adjustment dimension for the EVB
piston

• Undo the lock nut (6)


• Screw in the adjusting screw (1) to press the valve
Note
bridge (4) downwards as far as the pressure point
This procedure only needs to be
• Block the valve bridge (4) in this position with the
performed in the case of engines with
adjusting screw (5)
EVB.
• Insert the Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (2) with the
Holding device [115] (3) between the rocker arm • Lightly push down the valve bridge (4)
and the valve bridge (4) • Insert the Feeler gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (2) with the
• Unscrew the adjusting screw (1) until the Feeler Holding device [115] (3) between the adjusting
gauge leaf 0.5 [117] (2) can be moved between screw (1) and the valve bridge (4)
the rocker arm and the valve bridge (4) with little Adjust the EVB clearance if the adjustment
resistance dimension is not 0.35 mm.
• Brace the adjusting screw (1) and tighten the lock
nut (6) to 40 Nm
• Check the setting again and, if necessary, repeat
the setting procedure

296 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Setting the EVB clearance Connecting the plug bracket electrical


connections

Note • Connect the electrical connections (1)


This procedure only needs to be
performed in the case of engines with Mounting the cable duct cover
EVB.
Note
The valve bridge must not move the
exhaust valve when the adjusting screw
is screwed in.

• Undo the lock nut (1)


• Unscrew the adjusting screw (2) until the Feeler
gauge leaf 0.35 [116] (3) can be inserted with
Holding device [115] (4)
• Screw in the adjusting screw (2) with Feeler gauge
leaf 0.35 [116] (3) inserted until the valve bridge (5)
reaches the stop – this can be felt by a noticeable
increase in force
• Brace the adjusting screw (2) and tighten the lock
nut (1) to 40 Nm • Put on the cable duct cover (2)
• Check the setting again and, if necessary, repeat • Close the locking pin (1) a quarter turn
the setting procedure
Removing the engine barring gear
Mounting the cylinder head cover

• Remove the Engine barring gear [113] (1) from the


• Check the gasket in the cylinder head cover (2) ywheel housing
and the plug bracket; replace as necessary • Mount the cover on the ywheel housing
• Fit the cylinder head cover (2) over the plug
bracket and onto the cylinder head (1)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)
• Plug the bayonet ttings on the plug bracket

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 297


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing and installing the valve stem seals


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the injectors and rail, see 139
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292

(1) Valve (4) Valve spring


(2) Cylinder head (5) Valve collet
(3) Valve stem seal

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

298 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Special tools

[118] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:


• Gear ratchet [119]

[119] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

[120] Valve-spring compressor 80.99613-6000

• Removing and installing the valve springs in


conjunction with:
• Adapter [121]
• Holder [124]
• Holder [125]
• Extension [123]
• Assembly device [122]
[121] Adapter 80.99613-0041

• Removing and installing the valve springs

[122] Assembly device 80.99606-6092

• Removing and installing the valve springs

[123] Extension 80.99606-6094

• Removing and installing the valve springs

[124] Holder 80.99613-0052

• Removing and installing the valve springs

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 299


CYLINDER HEAD

[125] Holder 80.99613-0053

• Removing and installing the valve springs

[126] Magnetic pick-up tool 80.99639-0009

• Removing the valve cotters

[127] Assembly device 80.99606-6088

• Removing the valve stem seal


• Installing the valve stem seal in conjunction with:
• Assembling sleeve [128]

[128] Assembling sleeve 80.99606-0634

• Installing the valve stem seal

300 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing the valve stem seals Removal and installation position of valve stem
seals
Attaching the engine barring gear

• Remove and install the free valve stem seals as


• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing per the table
• Mount the Engine barring gear [118] (1) on the
ywheel housing Removing the rocker arm mechanism

Turning the engine to the TDC mark

Note
Do not unscrew the mounting bolt for the
• Turn the engine in the engine's running direction
rocker arm shaft in order to remove the
with the Engine barring gear [118] (1) and the Gear
rocker arm mechanism.
ratchet [119] until the 1st cylinder is at the TDC
mark (2) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)
• Remove the rocker arm mechanism (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 301


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing the valve bridges and push rods Assembling the special tool

• Mark the installation position of the valve bridges


(2) and (3)
• Remove the valve bridges (2) and (3)
• Pull out the push rods (1)

Note
Retaining washer and Holder [125] have
left-hand threads.

• Position the Holder [124] (5) and the Holder [125]


(3) on the Valve-spring compressor [120] (1) and
then screw on by turning the threaded spindle (4)
• Screw on the retaining washers (2) and (6)
• Position the lever (8) on the Valve-spring
compressor [120] (1) and secure using the
mounting bolt (7)

302 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Fitting the mounting device Mounting the valve-spring compressor

• Screw the Adapter [121] (1) into the cylinder head • Position the Holder [124] (4) and the Holder [125]
• Screw the Assembly device [122] (2) into the on the spring cap and tension by turning the
Adapter [121] (1) threaded spindle (5)
• Hook the Valve-spring compressor [120] (2) in the
Assembly device [122] (3)
• Place the Extension [123] (1) onto Valve-spring
compressor [120] (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 303


CYLINDER HEAD

Removing the valve cotters Removing the valve springs

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to springing back of
the valve springs
• Ensure that the Holder [124] and
Holder [125] are seated correctly on
the spring cap
• Do not remove the valve cotters from
the valve spring with your bare hands

• Push down the Valve-spring compressor [120] (1)


with the Extension [123]
• Remove the valve cotters (2) from the valve stem
(3) with the Magnetic pick-up tool [126]
• Release the Valve-spring compressor [120] (1)
• Repeat the same procedure for all the valves • Remove the washer (3), valve spring (2) and
• Remove the special tool spring cap (1) over the valve stem
• Repeat the same procedure for all the valves

Removing the valve stem seals

• Push the Assembly device [127] (2) over the valve


stem seal (1)
• Clamp the Assembly device [127] (2)
• Pull the valve stem seal (1) off the valve guide with
the impact weight (3)

304 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Installing the valve stem seals Installing the valve springs

Installing the valve stem seals

• Insert the washer (3), valve spring (2) and spring


cap (1) over the valve stem
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the Assembling • Repeat the same procedure for all the valves
sleeve [128] (2) and valve stem seal (3)
• Push the Assembling sleeve [128] (2) over the
valve stem (1)
• Insert the valve stem seal (3) into the Assembly
device [127] (4) and clamp
• Push the Assembly device [127] (4) over the
Assembling sleeve [128] (2)
• Knock the valve stem seal (3) onto the valve stem
(1) using the impact weight (5)
• Remove the Assembly device [127] (4) and the
Assembling sleeve [128] (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 305


CYLINDER HEAD

Fitting the mounting device Mounting the valve-spring compressor

• Screw the Adapter [121] (1) into the cylinder head • Position the Holder [124] (4) and the Holder [125]
• Screw the Assembly device [122] (2) into the on the spring cap and tension by turning the
Adapter [121] (1) threaded spindle (5)
• Hook the Valve-spring compressor [120] (2) in the
Assembly device [122] (3)
• Place the Extension [123] (1) onto Valve-spring
compressor [120] (2)

306 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CYLINDER HEAD

Installing the valve cotters Moving the engine into the removal and
installation position

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to springing back of Note
the valve springs The procedure described below must
• Ensure that the Holder [124] and also be carried out for the remaining
Holder [125] are seated correctly on cylinders.
the spring cap
• Do not insert the valve cotters into the • Turn the engine a further 120° in the engine's
valve spring with your bare hands running direction with the Engine barring
gear [118] and the Gear ratchet [119]
• Push down the Valve-spring compressor [120] (1) • Remove and install the free valve stem seals
with the Extension [123] as per the table, see Removal and installation
• Use a suitable tool to insert the valve cotters (2) so position of valve stem seals, 301
that the valve cotters (2) are seated in the grooves
of the valve stem (3) Installing the valve bridges and push rods
• Release the Valve-spring compressor [120] (1)
• Remove the special tool

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the balls of the


push rods (1)
• Insert the push rods (1) into the ball cups of the
tappets
• Fit the valve bridges (2) and (3) as marked

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 307


CYLINDER HEAD

Installing the rocker arm mechanism

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the ball cups of


the push rods
• Fit the rocker arm mechanism (1) onto the cylinder
head and align it whilst inserting the adjusting
screw balls for the rocker arms into the push rod
• Screw in the mounting bolts (2) and tighten them
crosswise

Removing the engine barring gear

• Remove the Engine barring gear [118] (1) from the


ywheel housing
• Mount the cover on the ywheel housing

308 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


VALVE TIMING

VALVE TIMING

(1) Tappet (2) Camshaft

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 309


VALVE TIMING

CAMSHAFT / CAMSHAFT BEARINGS


Removing and installing the camshaft/camshaft bearings
Additional jobs
– Draining and topping up the engine oil
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging), see 213
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361
– Removing and installing the starter, see 119
– Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox, see 365
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135
– Removing and installing the injectors and rail, see 139
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 153
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 155
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 167
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 169
– Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal, see 399
– Removing and installing the timing case cover, see 431
– Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant), see 267
– Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant), see 249
– Removing and installing the air distributor pipe, see 243
– Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism, see 277
– Removing and installing the cylinder head, see 285
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339
– Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55), see 427
– Removing and installing the timing gears, see 323
– Removing and installing the timing case, see 435
– Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal, see 403
– Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant without power take-off), see 415
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 441
– Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 300 Nm), see 418
– Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 600 Nm), see 423
– Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods, see 375
– Removing and installing the crankshaft, see 387
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 311


VALVE TIMING

(1) Tappet (2) Camshaft

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
For design reasons, there are seven bearing seats for the camshaft in the crankcase; however,
only ve camshaft bearings are installed.
The camshaft bearings are located in camshaft bearing seats 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7.

312 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


VALVE TIMING

Special tools

[129] Insertion pin 80.99617-6008

• Removing and installing the camshaft in


conjunction with:
• Pan head screw [130]

[130] Pan head screw 06.02099-0357

• Removing and installing the camshaft

[131] Centring device 80.99606-6102

• Removing camshaft bearings 2, 3 and 4 in


conjunction with:
• Press-out plate [136]
• Centring plate [137]
• Installing camshaft bearings 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in
conjunction with:
• Impact punch [132]
• Installer sleeve [133]
• Installer sleeve [134]
• Installer sleeve [135]
• Centring plate [137]
[132] Impact punch 80.99606-0546

• Installing camshaft bearings 1 and 5

[133] Installer sleeve 80.99606-6113

• Installing camshaft bearing 5

[134] Installer sleeve 80.99606-6112

• Installing camshaft bearings 2, 3, 4 and 5

[135] Installer sleeve 80.99606-6114

• Installing camshaft bearing 1

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 313


VALVE TIMING

[136] Press-out plate 80.99602-0162

• Removing camshaft bearings 2, 3 and 4

[137] Centring plate 80.99606-6110

• Removing camshaft bearings 2, 3 and 4


• Installing camshaft bearings 1, 2, 3 and 4

[138] Impact extractor 80.99602-0016

• Removing camshaft bearings 1 and 5 in


conjunction with:
• Extractor device [139]

[139] Extractor device 80.99602-6012

• Removing camshaft bearings 1 and 5

314 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


VALVE TIMING

Removing the camshaft Removing the tappet

Removing the ange

• Pull the tappet (2) out of the crankcase (1)

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the ange (2)

Mounting the special tool

• Position the adapter (3) from the Insertion pin [129]


(1) on the camshaft (4)
• Screw in and tighten the Pan head screw [130] (2)
• Screw the Insertion pin [129] (1) into the adapter
(3)

Removing the camshaft

• Pull the camshaft (2) out of the crankcase (1)


towards the ywheel end

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 315


VALVE TIMING

Removing the camshaft bearings Removing camshaft bearing 1

Removal sequence

• Pull out the camshaft bearing (2) with the Impact


extractor [138] (1) and Extractor device [139] (3)
Note
Removing camshaft bearings 2 - 4
Reference is made to the illustrated
sequence in all the following steps.

• Stick to the removal sequence for the camshaft


bearings (1) in the following work steps

Inserting the special tool for camshaft bearing 1

Note
The procedure described below must
also be carried out for camshaft bearings
3 and 4.

• Insert the Press-out plate [136] (1) into the


• Push the Impact extractor [138] (1) through camshaft bearing (2)
the camshaft bearing (3) with the Extractor • Insert the short end of Centring device [131] (3)
device [139] (2) folded up into the Press-out plate [136] (1) until the washer
• Fold down the Extractor device [139] (2) behind (5) reaches the stop
the camshaft bearing (3) and centre in the • Push the Centring plate [137] (4) onto the Centring
camshaft bearing bore device [131] (3) and engage in the crankcase oil
bore
• Remove the camshaft bearing (2)

316 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


VALVE TIMING

Inserting the special tool for camshaft bearing 5 Installing the camshaft bearings
Installation instructions for camshaft bearings

• Push the Impact extractor [138] (2) through


the camshaft bearing (3) with the Extractor
device [139] (1) folded up • Push on the camshaft bearing (1) with the notch
• Fold down the Extractor device [139] (1) behind (5) to Installer sleeve [134] (2) so that the ball (3)
the camshaft bearing (3) and centre in the engages in the oil bore (4)
camshaft bearing bore A centring bore can be seen in the second oil bore.

Removing camshaft bearing 5 Installation sequence

• Pull out the camshaft bearing (2) with the Impact Note
extractor [138] (1) and Extractor device [139] (3) Reference is made to the illustrated
sequence in all the following steps.

• Stick to the installation sequence for the camshaft


bearings (1) in the following work steps

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 317


VALVE TIMING

Installing camshaft bearing 4 Installing camshaft bearings 3 and 2

• Insert the Centring plate [137] (1) into bearing


Note
seat 6 as marked so that the spring-loaded ball
The procedure described below must
engages in the oil bore
also be carried out for camshaft bearing
• Position the Installer sleeve [134] (2) at bearing
2.
seat 5 with the camshaft bearing pushed on
To ensure rocker arm lubrication, only one
• Insert the short end of the Centring device [131]
oil bore is free at camshaft bearing 2.
(3) into the Installer sleeve [134] (2) and Centring
plate [137] (1)
• Insert the Centring plate [137] (5) into bearing
• Push the second Centring plate [137] over the
seat 4 as marked so that the spring-loaded ball
Centring device [131] (3) as marked and insert
engages in the oil bore
into bearing seat 1 so that the spring loaded ball
• Position the Installer sleeve [134] (3) at bearing
engages in the oil bore
seat 3 with the camshaft bearing (4) pushed on
• Install the camshaft bearing
• Insert the long side of the Centring device [131]
(1) into the Installer sleeve [134] (3) and Centring
plate [137] (5)
• Push the second Centring plate [137] (2) over the
Centring device [131] (1) as marked and insert
into bearing seat 1 so that the spring loaded ball
engages in the oil bore
• Install the camshaft bearing (4)
• Leave the Centring plate [137] (5) in bearing seat
4

318 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


VALVE TIMING

Installing camshaft bearing 1 Installing camshaft bearing 5

Note Note
The notch on the camshaft bearing must The notch on the camshaft bearing must
be facing the timing case end. be facing the timing case end.

• Push the Installer sleeve [135] (3) with pushed-on • Insert the Installer sleeve [134] (5) into camshaft
camshaft bearing (4) onto the long side of the bearing seat 4 as marked so that the spring-loaded
Centring device [131] (2) ball engages in the oil bore
• Insert the Centring device [131] (2) into the • Push the Installer sleeve [133] (2) with pushed-on
Centring plate [137] (5) with the Installer camshaft bearing (1) onto the long side of the
sleeve [135] (3) Centring device [131] (4)
• Knock in the camshaft bearing (4) with the Impact • Insert the Centring device [131] (4) into the
punch [132] (1) until ush Installer sleeve [134] (5) with the Installer
sleeve [133] (2)
• Knock in the camshaft bearing (1) with the Impact
punch [132] (3) until ush

Checking the oil bores

• Check that the oil bores (2) for the camshaft


bearings (1) are in the correct position
The oil bores for the camshaft bearings must
match up with the oil bores in the crankcase (3);
if necessary, remove the camshaft bearings and
install new camshaft bearings correctly.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 319


VALVE TIMING

Installing the camshaft Mounting the ange

Installing the tappet

• Position the ange (2)


• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
• Insert the tappet (2) into the crankcase (1)

Installing the camshaft

WARNING
Camshafts can be damaged during
installation
• Always install the camshaft using
special tools

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the camshaft (2)


and camshaft bearings
• Mount the adapter on the camshaft (2) with the
Pan head screw [130]
• Screw the Insertion pin [129] into the adapter
• Insert the camshaft (2) into the crankcase (1)
• Remove the Insertion pin [129]

320 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TIMING GEARS

TIMING GEARS

(1) Intermediate gear 2 (4) Crankshaft gear


(2) Oil pump drive gear (5) Camshaft gear
(3) Intermediate gear pin

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 321


TIMING GEARS

TIMING GEARS
Removing and installing the timing gears
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361
– Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal, see 399
– Removing and installing the timing case cover, see 431

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 323


TIMING GEARS

(1) Intermediate gear 2 (4) Crankshaft gear


(2) Oil pump drive gear (5) Camshaft gear
(3) Intermediate gear pin

Technical data
Mounting bolts, camshaft gear (5).......................... M10x1.25x38-10.9 .............................................65 Nm
Mounting nut, oil pump drive gear (2)..................... M12x1.5-6S .......................................................45 Nm

Timing gear installation play


Radial play, intermediate gear 1 ..................................................................................... 0.060 - 0.109 mm
Axial play, intermediate gear 1........................................................................................ 0.200 - 0.280 mm
Radial play, intermediate gear 2 (1) ................................................................................ 0.035 - 0.076 mm
Axial play, intermediate gear 2 (1)................................................................................... 0.100 - 0.200 mm

Timing gear backlash


Crankshaft gear (4) - camshaft gear (5) .......................................................................... 0.051 - 0.149 mm
Camshaft gear (5) - air compressor gear......................................................................... 0.051 - 0.185 mm
Crankshaft gear (4) - intermediate gear 1........................................................................ 0.050 - 0.187 mm
Intermediate gear 1 - intermediate gear 2 (1) .................................................................. 0.051 - 0.175 mm
Intermediate gear 1 - oil pump drive gear (2) ................................................................... 0.053 - 0.190 mm

Service products
Loctite 574 sealing compound ............................................................................................ 04.10160-9202
Loctite 648 sealing compound ............................................................................................ 04.10160-9164

324 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TIMING GEARS

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[140] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Blocking the engine


• Cranking the engine in conjunction with:
• Gear ratchet [141]

[141] Gear ratchet 80.99627-0001

• Cranking the engine

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 325


TIMING GEARS

Removing and installing the Setting the timing gears to the mark
intermediate gears
Fixing the crankshaft gear

• Crank the engine with the Engine barring


gear [140] and the Gear ratchet [141] until
the marks on the camshaft gear (1) and on the
• Fix the crankshaft gear (2) using two mounting crankshaft gear (2) match up
bolts (1) • Block the Engine barring gear [140]
Attaching the engine barring gear Undoing the oil pump drive gear mounting nut

• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing • Undo the mounting nut (1)
• Mount the Engine barring gear [140] (1) on the
ywheel housing Removing intermediate gear 2

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the intermediate gear pin (2) and
intermediate gear (3)

326 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TIMING GEARS

Removing intermediate gear 1 Installing the oil pump drive gear

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts • Thinly apply Loctite 648 sealing compound on the
(1) and (2) cone in the drive gear for the oil pump (2) and on
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2) the oil pump
• Remove the intermediate gear pin (3) and • Fit the drive gear for the oil pump (2)
intermediate gear (4) • Screw on the mounting nut (1)

Removing the oil pump drive gear Mounting intermediate gear 1

• Unscrew the mounting nut (1) • Thinly apply clean engine oil on the intermediate
• Pull off the drive gear for the oil pump (2) gear pin (3)
• Position the intermediate gear pin (3) with the
intermediate gear (4)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
and (2) as marked

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 327


TIMING GEARS

Mounting intermediate gear 2 Removing and installing the camshaft


gear and crankshaft gear
Unscrewing the camshaft gear mounting bolts

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the intermediate


gear pin (2)
• Position the intermediate gear pin (2) with the
intermediate gear (3) • Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
Removing the camshaft gear
Tightening the oil pump drive gear mounting nut

• Pull the camshaft gear (1) off the camshaft (2)


• Tighten the mounting nut (1) to 45 Nm
Mounting the camshaft gear

• Line up the marks on the camshaft gear (1) and


crankshaft gear
• Line up the camshaft (2) with the hole pattern for
the camshaft gear (1), as necessary
• Place the camshaft gear (1) over the guide pin and
onto the camshaft (2)

328 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TIMING GEARS

Screwing in the camshaft gear mounting bolts Fitting the crankshaft gear

• Screw in new mounting bolts (1) and tighten to 65 • Apply a thin coat of Loctite 574 sealing compound
Nm on the back of the crankshaft gear (1)
• Line up the marks on the camshaft gear and
Unscrewing the crankshaft gear mounting bolts crankshaft gear (1)
• Place the crankshaft gear (1) over the guide pin
(3) and onto the crankshaft (2)

Fixing the crankshaft gear

• Release the crankshaft gear (2) by unscrewing the


mounting bolts (1)

Removing the crankshaft gear


• Fix the crankshaft gear (2) using two mounting
bolts (1)

• Pull the crankshaft gear (1) off the crankshaft (2)


• Clean the contact surfaces of the crankshaft gear
(1), crankshaft (2) and guide pin (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 329


TIMING GEARS

Checking the overlap marking

• Release the Engine barring gear [140] and turn


the crankshaft through 720°
• Check that the marks on the camshaft gear (1) and
crankshaft gear (2) match up
If the marks do not match up, remove the camshaft
gear (1) and then re-insert it as marked.

Unscrewing the crankshaft gear mounting bolts

• Release the crankshaft gear (2) by unscrewing the


mounting bolts (1)

Removing the engine barring gear

• Remove the Engine barring gear [140] (1) from the


ywheel housing
• Mount the cover on the ywheel housing

330 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

ENGINE LUBRICATION

(1) O-rings (8) Pressure-relief valve


(2) Oil cooler (9) Oil intake pipe
(3) Gasket (10) Covering pan
(4) Pressure transmitter (11) Mounting bolt
(5) Oil module (12) Oil pump
(6) Gasket (13) Coupling sleeve
(7) Oil sump

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 331


ENGINE LUBRICATION

OIL MODULE
Removing and installing the oil module

(1) Mounting bolt (7) Mounting bolt


(2) Oil module (8) Screw plug
(3) Pressure transmitter (9) Gasket
(4) Sealing ring (10) Gasket
(5) Screw-in tting (11) Oil cooler
(6) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Oil lter cover .................................................................................................................................25 Nm
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M6x20 ...............................................................12 Nm
Pressure transmitter (3) ........................................ M18x1.5 ............................................................47 Nm
Screw-in tting (5) ................................................ M30x1.5 ............................................................60 Nm
Screw plug (8) ...................................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................42 Nm

Service products
Loctite 2701 sealing compound .......................................................................................... 04.10160-9353

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 333


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Special tools

[142] Oil lter wrench 80.99606-0581

• Removing and installing the oil lter cover

334 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil lter Installing the oil lter


Removing the oil lter

• Insert the new oil lter (3) into the oil lter cover (2)
• Screw the oil lter cover (2) into the oil module (4)
• Unscrew the oil lter cover (2) from the oil module with the Oil lter wrench [142] (1) and tighten to 25
(4) with the Oil lter wrench [142] (1) Nm
• Pull the oil lter (3) out of the oil lter cover (2)

Renewing the sealing rings

• Remove the O-ring (4) from the oil lter cover (3)
• Remove the O-rings (1) and (2)
• Fit the new O-ring (4) on the oil lter cover (3)
• Fit new O-rings (1) and (2)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the O-rings (1),
(2) and (4)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 335


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil module Detaching the oil module

Draining the coolant

Note
If the screw-in tting has come loose, it
WARNING must be unscrewed.
Danger of engine damage due to oil
emulsion
• Unscrew the pressure transmitter (1) and remove
• Drain all the coolant before removing
with the sealing ring (2)
the oil module, otherwise coolant will
• Unscrew and clean the screw-in tting (3) if
enter the oil sump when the oil module
necessary
is removed from the crankcase
• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts
(4)
• Unscrew the screw plug (1) and remove with the
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)
sealing ring
• Remove the oil module (5) with gasket (6)
• Drain the coolant
• Clean the mating faces
Disconnecting the pressure transmitter
Removing the oil cooler
electrical connection

• Disconnect the electrical connection (1) for the • Put the oil module (3) aside so as not to damage
pressure transmitter (2) the oil cooler (4)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the oil cooler (4) with gasket (2) from the
oil module (3)
• Clean the mating faces

336 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Installing the oil module Connecting the pressure transmitter electrical


connection
Installing the oil cooler

• Connect the electrical connection (1) for the


• Insert the oil cooler (4) with a new gasket (2) into pressure transmitter (2)
the oil module (3)
• Screw in new mounting bolts (1) and tighten to 12 Screwing in the screw plug
Nm

Mounting the oil module

• Screw in the screw plug (1) with a new sealing ring


• Tighten the screw plug (1) to 42 Nm

• Position the oil module (5) with a new gasket (6)


• Screw in the new mounting bolts (4) as marked
and then tighten them
• If necessary, thinly apply Loctite 2701 sealing
compound on the outer thread of the screw-in
tting (3)
• If necessary, screw the screw-in tting (3) into the
oil module and tighten it to 60 Nm
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the thread of the
pressure transmitter (1)
• Screw the pressure transmitter (1) with a new
sealing ring (2) into the screw-in tting and then
tighten to 47 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 337


ENGINE LUBRICATION

OIL SUMP AND OIL INTAKE PIPE


Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411

(1) Covering pan (6) Oil sump


(2) Mounting bolt (7) Absorber mat
(3) Spacer (8) Holding piece
(4) Crankcase yoke (9) Mounting bolt
(5) Gasket

Technical data
Oil level sensor..................................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Oil drain plug........................................................ M22x1.5-5.8 ......................................................75 Nm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 339


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil sump and oil intake Removing the covering pan
pipe
Disconnecting the oil level sensor electrical
connection

• Disconnect the electrical connection (2)


• Free, set aside and secure the wiring harness for
the oil level sensor (1)

Removing the oil level sensor

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)


• Remove the covering pan (2) with the absorber
mat (1) and spacers (4)

• Unscrew the oil level sensor (1) and remove with


the sealing ring (2)

340 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil sump Removing the oil excess pressure valve

• Unscrew the screw plug (1) and remove with the


sealing ring (2)
• Remove the pressure spring (3) with piston (4)
from the crankcase

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2)


• Remove the holding pieces (1)
• Remove the oil sump (3)
• Pull the gasket (4) off the oil sump (3)
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the oil intake pipe

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)


• Pull the oil intake pipe (3) out of the crankcase
yoke (1)
• Remove the O-ring (2) from the crankcase yoke
(1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 341


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe Mounting the oil sump

Installing the oil excess pressure valve

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the piston (4)


• Insert the piston (4) with pressure spring (3) into
the crankcase
• Screw in the screw plug (2) with a new sealing ring
(1) and tighten it

Installing the oil intake pipe

• Fit a new gasket (4) on the oil sump (3)


• Position the oil sump (3)
• Fit the holding pieces (1)
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) and tighten
them by hand
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2)

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the new O-ring (2)


and insert into the crankcase yoke (1)
• Insert the oil intake pipe (3) into the crankcase
yoke (1)
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (4)

342 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Mounting the covering pan Connecting the oil level sensor electrical
connection

• Route the wiring harness for the oil level sensor


(1) so that it is not under tension, not kinked and
there are no chang points
• Connect the electrical connection (2)

• Insert the absorber mat (1) into the covering pan


(2)
• Position the covering pan (2) with spacers (4)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (3)

Installing the oil level sensor

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the thread of the


oil level sensor (1)
• Screw in the oil level sensor (1) with a new sealing
ring (2) and then tighten it to 25 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 343


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing and installing the oil sump lower section (Euro 5 and EEV variant)

(1) Oil sump upper section (4) Holding piece


(2) Gasket (5) Mounting bolt
(3) Oil sump lower section

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

344 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil sump Installing the oil sump


Removing the oil sump Installing the oil intake pipe

• Position the oil intake pipe (3) with a new gasket


(2)
• Screw in the mounting bolts (4) and tighten them
by hand
• Position the pipe clamp with washer on the oil
sump upper section (1)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (5)
• Tighten the mounting bolts (4)

• Remove the covering pan


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)
• Remove the holding pieces (3)
• Remove the oil sump (2) with the gasket (1)
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the oil intake pipe

• Unscrew the mounting bolt (5) and remove it with


the washer
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)
• Remove the oil intake pipe (3) with gasket (2) from
the oil sump upper section (1)
• Clean the mating faces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 345


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Installing the oil sump

• Fit a new gasket (1) on the oil sump (2)


• Position the oil sump (2)
• Position the holding pieces (3)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (4)
• Mount the covering pan

346 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing and installing the oil sump upper section (Euro 5 and EEV variant)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the oil sump lower section (Euro 5 and EEV variant), see 344
– Removing and installing the intercooler, see 205

(1) Mounting bolt (3) Crankcase


(2) Oil sump upper section

Technical data
Oil level sensor..................................................... M18...................................................................45 Nm

Service products
Loctite 5900 sealing compound .......................................................................................... 04.10394-9292

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 347


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil sump upper section Removing the oil level probe

Detaching the oil return line

• Disconnect the electrical connection for the oil


level probe (1)
• Unscrew the union nut (1) • Unscrew the oil level probe (1) and remove the
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (3) sealing ring (2)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (4)
• Remove the oil return line (2) with the gasket (5) Removing the oil sump
• Clean the mating faces

Detaching the oil return line

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the oil sump (2) from the crankcase (3)
• Clean the mating faces
• Unscrew the hollow screw (4) and remove it with
the sealing rings (1) and (5)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the oil return line (2) with the gasket
• Clean the mating faces

348 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Installing the oil sump upper section Attaching the oil return line

Mounting the oil sump upper section

• Position the oil return line (2) with a new gasket


• Screw in the mounting bolts (3) and tighten them
• Thinly apply Loctite 5900 sealing compound on by hand
the contact surfaces of the crankcase (3) • Screw in the hollow screw (4) with new sealing
• Position the oil sump (2) on the crankcase (3) rings (1) and (5) and then tighten it
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1) • Tighten the mounting bolts (3)

Installing the oil level probe Attaching the oil return line

• Screw in the oil level probe (1) with a new sealing • Install the oil return line (2) with a new gasket (5)
ring (2) and tighten it to 45 Nm • Screw in the mounting bolts (4) and tighten them
• Connect the electrical connection for the oil level by hand
probe (1) • Screw in the mounting bolt (3) and tighten it by
hand
• Tighten the mounting bolts (3) and (4)
• Tighten the union nut (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 349


ENGINE LUBRICATION

OIL PUMP
Removing and installing the oil pump
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 153
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 155
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 167
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 169
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339
– Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal, see 399
– Removing and installing the timing case cover, see 431
– Removing and installing the timing gears, see 323
– Removing and installing the timing case, see 435

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 351


ENGINE LUBRICATION

(1) Oil pump gear (4) O-rings


(2) Oil pump gear (5) Coupling sleeve
(3) Oil pump housing

Technical data
Oil pump gear axial play................................................................................................. 0.050 - 0.114 mm
Radial play, oil pump shaft ............................................................................................. 0.050 - 0.078 mm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[143] Straightedge 80.99605-0167

• Checking the oil pump gear axial play

352 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil pump Checking the oil pump gear axial play

Unscrewing the oil pump mounting bolts

• Place the Straightedge [143] (3) with measuring


edge on the oil pump housing (4)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Check the axial play between the oil pump gears
(2) and the Straightedge [143] using a feeler gauge
Detaching the oil pump (1)
The permitted axial play is 0.050 - 0.114 mm

Dismantling the oil pump

• Pull the coupling sleeve (1) out of the oil pump (3)
• Pull the oil pump (3) out of the timing case
• Remove the O-rings (2) from the coupling sleeve
(1) • Pull the oil pump gears (1) and (3) out of the oil
pump housing (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 353


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Installing the oil pump Screwing in the oil pump mounting bolts

Assembling the oil pump

• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)


• Check that the oil pump gears run freely; repeat
Note the above procedure if necessary
Each of the oil pump gears is marked with
a point on one of the teeth on the face of
the gear.

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the oil pump gears


(1) and (3)
• Insert the oil pump gears (1) and (3) into the oil
pump housing (2) so that the marks are in line

Mounting the oil pump

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the new O-rings


(2)
• Fit the O-rings (2) on the coupling sleeve (1)
• Insert the coupling sleeve (1) into the oil pump (3)
until the stop is reached
• Insert the oil pump (3) into the timing case

354 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

OIL INJECTOR NOZZLES


Removing and installing the oil injector nozzles
Additional jobs
– Draining and topping up the engine oil
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339
– Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55), see 427

(1) Oil injector nozzle (3) Oil pressure valve


(2) Spring washer

Technical data
Oil pressure valve (3)............................................ M12...................................................................40 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 355


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

356 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE LUBRICATION

Removing the oil injector nozzles Installing the oil injector nozzles
Inserting the oil injector nozzles

• Unscrew the oil pressure valve (2) and remove


with the spring washer
• Remove the oil injector nozzle (1) WARNING
Component damage caused by piston
overheating
• Align the oil injector nozzle correctly

• Insert the oil injector nozzle (2) with the injector


nozzle facing the piston in the liner
• Screw in the oil pressure valve with a new spring
washer and tighten by hand
• Align the oil injector nozzle (2) so that the xing
balls can be felt engaging into the recesses (1)

Tightening the oil pressure valve

• Check the oil injector nozzle (1) is correctly seated


and align it if necessary
• Tighten the oil pressure valve (2) to 40 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 357


CRANK MECHANISM

CRANK MECHANISM

(1) Flywheel (4) Vibration damper


(2) Crankshaft (5) Connecting rod
(3) Bearing cap (6) Piston

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 359


CRANK MECHANISM

VIBRATION DAMPER
Removing and installing the vibration damper
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93

(1) Mounting bolt (4) Poly-V-belt pulley


(2) Washer (5) Vibration damper
(3) Mounting bolt

Technical data
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M14x1.5x95-10.9 ..........................Initial torque 150 Nm
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M14x1.5x95-10.9 .................................Final torque 90°

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 361


CRANK MECHANISM

Note
An oil slinger is mounted on the rear of the vibration damper. When removing and installing the
vibration damper, check the oil slinger for damage and, if necessary, replace it.

Special tools

[144] Engine barring gear 80.99626-6008

• Barring the engine

362 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Removing the vibration damper Installing the vibration damper


Attaching the engine barring gear Mounting the vibration damper

• Remove the cover from the ywheel housing • Position the vibration damper (3) with washer (2)
• Mount and lock the Engine barring gear [144] (1) • Screw in new mounting bolts (1) and tighten to
Initial torque 150 Nm
Removing the poly-V-belt pulley • Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to Final torque 90°

Mounting the poly-V-belt pulley

• Mark the installed position of the poly-V-belt pulley


(2) relative to the vibration damper (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Position the poly-V-belt pulley (2) on the vibration
• Remove the poly-V-belt pulley (2) damper (3) as marked
• Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)
Removing the vibration damper

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the vibration damper (3) with washer (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 363


CRANK MECHANISM

Removing the engine barring gear

• Release and remove the Engine barring gear [144]


(1)
• Mount the cover on the ywheel housing

364 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

FLYWHEEL FOR MANUAL GEARBOX


Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox

(1) Flywheel (3) Flywheel housing


(2) Mounting bolt

Technical data, ywheel housing without power take-off


Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x30-10.9 ..........................Initial torque 100 Nm
Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x30-10.9 .................................Final torque 90°
Lateral runout, ywheel (1)....................................................................................................Max. 0.5 mm
Flywheel ring gear installation temperature .............................................................................220 - 240 °C

Technical data, ywheel housing with power take-off


Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x87-10.9 ..........................Initial torque 100 Nm
Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x87-10.9 .................................Final torque 90°
Lateral runout, ywheel (1)....................................................................................................Max. 0.5 mm
Flywheel ring gear installation temperature .............................................................................220 - 240 °C

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 365


CRANK MECHANISM

Special tools

[145] Internal extractor 08.99615-1410

• Pulling out the clutch pilot bearing in conjunction


with:
• Internal extractor [145]

[146] Support 08.99615-0015

• Extracting the clutch pilot bearing

[147] Dial gauge 08.71000-3217

• Checking the ywheel lateral runout in


conjunction with:
• Dial gauge holder [148]
• Locating pin [149]

[148] Dial gauge holder 08.71082-0005

• Checking the ywheel lateral runout

[149] Locating pin 80.99605-0197

• Checking the ywheel lateral runout

[150] Pressing plate 80.99604-0302

• Pressing in the clutch pilot bearing in conjunction


with:
• Thrust disc [151]
• Plug-on handle [152]

[151] Thrust disc 80.99617-0144

• Pressing in the clutch pilot bearing

[152] Plug-on handle 80.99617-0187

• Pressing in the clutch pilot bearing

366 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

[153] Guide pin 80.99617-0163

• Removing and installing the ywheel

[154] Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 80.99619-0006

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts in conjunction with:
• Socket, size 22 [155]
• Support [156]
• Torque angle gauge [157]
• Stop pin [158]
• Pan head screw [159]
• Connecting pin [160]
• Rubber ring 42 mm [161]
• Washer [162]
[155] Socket, size 22 80.99612-0024

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

[156] Support 80.99606-0551

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

[157] Torque angle gauge 80.99607-0172

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

[158] Stop pin 80.99606-0585

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

[159] Pan head screw 06.02191-0407

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 367


CRANK MECHANISM

[160] Connecting pin 06.22729-0006

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

[161] Rubber ring 42 mm 08.06142-9006

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

[162] Washer 80.99609-0033

• Undoing and tightening the ywheel mounting


bolts

368 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Removing the ywheel Unscrewing the ywheel mounting bolts

Assembling the special tool

• Unscrew two opposite-facing mounting bolts (1)

• Insert the Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 [154] (1) into Screwing in the guide pins
the Support [156] (2)
• Mount the Stop pin [158] (5) on the Support [156]
(2) with the Pan head screw [159] (4) and
Washer [162] (3)
• Fit the Torque angle gauge [157] (9) on the Torque
multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 [154] (1)
• Fit the Socket, size 22 [155] (7) on the Torque
multiplier i = 1 : 3.3 [154] (1) and secure with
the Connecting pin [160] (8) and Rubber ring 42
mm [161] (6)

Undoing the ywheel mounting bolts

• Screw in the Guide pin [153] (1) and (2)


• Unscrew the remaining mounting bolts

Pulling off the ywheel

• Put the special tool (1) on the mounting bolt that is


going to be undone
• Undo all the mounting bolts

CAUTION
Danger of injury due to heavy
components
• Use lifting gear to remove the ywheel

• Pull off the ywheel (1) over the Guide pin [153]
(2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 369


CRANK MECHANISM

Cleaning the ywheel Removing and installing the ywheel


ring gear
Removing the ywheel ring gear

• Clean the ywheel


• Check the ywheel for cracks, t a new ywheel if
necessary
• Check the friction surface (1) for burns and traces WARNING
of running in; t a new ywheel if necessary Component damage due to
• Check the teeth (2) on the ywheel ring gear for spot-drilling of the ywheel
wear; t a new ywheel ring gear if necessary • Take care not to damage the ywheel
when spot-drilling the ywheel ring gear
• Renew the spot-drilled ywheel

• Spot-drill the ywheel ring gear (1) force it open


• Remove the ywheel ring gear (1) from the
ywheel (2)
• Clean the contact surfaces of the ywheel (2) and
check for damage

Mounting the ywheel ring gear

CAUTION
Danger of injury due to hot
components
• Mount the ywheel ring gear whilst
wearing protective gloves

• Heat the ywheel ring gear (1) to 220 - 240 °C


• Fit the ywheel ring gear (1) so that the chamfer
(3) on the teeth is facing away from the ywheel
(2) and then line up the holes in the ywheel ring
gear (1) with the ywheel (2)
• Adjust the ywheel ring gear (1) as necessary

370 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Installing the ywheel Unscrewing the aligning tools

Checking the ywheel lateral runout

• Screw in the new ywheel mounting bolts


• Unscrew the Guide pin [153] (1) and (2)
• Clamp the ywheel (1)
• Mount the Dial gauge holder [148] (2) with the Dial Screwing in the ywheel mounting bolts
gauge [147] (3) and Locating pin [149]
• Position the Locating pin [149] on the ywheel (1)
with a preload
• Zero the Dial gauge [147] (3)
• Turn the ywheel (1) a few turns and, at the same
time, read off the deection of the Dial gauge [147]
(3)
The permitted lateral runout of the ywheel (1) is
Max. 0.5 mm.

If the lateral runout is out of tolerance, t a new


ywheel (1).

Fitting the ywheel

• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1)

CAUTION
Danger of injury due to heavy
components
• Use lifting gear to install the ywheel

• Line up the ywheel (1) with the crankshaft


alignment pin
• Fit the ywheel (1) over the Guide pin [153] (2)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 371


CRANK MECHANISM

Tightening the mounting bolts Removing the clutch pilot bearing


Removing the circlip

Note
Note the ratio: Torque multiplier i = 1 :
• Detach the circlip (2) using internal circlip pliers (1)
3.3 [154].
Mounting the extractor device
• Tighten the mounting bolts to Initial torque 100 Nm
using the special tool (1)
• Tighten the mounting bolts to Final torque 90°
using the special tool (1)

• Insert the Internal extractor [145] (2) into the clutch


pilot bearing and expand as far as the stop
• Mount the Support [146] (1) on the Internal
extractor [145] (2)

Extracting the clutch pilot bearing

• Extract the clutch pilot bearing (2) using the special


tool (1)

372 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Installing the clutch pilot bearing


Pressing in the clutch pilot bearing

• Assemble the special tool (1), consisting of


Plug-on handle [152], Thrust disc [151] and
Pressing plate [150]
• Use the special tool (1) to press the new clutch
pilot bearing (2) into the ywheel until the stop is
reached

Installing the circlip

• Attach the circlip (2) using internal circlip pliers (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 373


CRANK MECHANISM

PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS


Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging), see 213
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant), see 267
– Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant), see 249
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135
– Removing and installing the injectors and rail, see 139
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the air distributor pipe, see 243
– Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism, see 277
– Removing and installing the cylinder head, see 285
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339
– Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55), see 427
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 441

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 375


CRANK MECHANISM

(1) Connecting rod bearing bolt (6) Piston


(2) Connecting rod bearing cap (7) Keystone ring
(3) Connecting rod (8) Taper-face ring
(4) Circlip (9) Double-bevelled ring
(5) Piston pin

Technical data
Connecting rod bearing bolt (1) ............................. M11x1.5x60-11.9............................ Initial torque 55 Nm
Connecting rod bearing bolt (1) ............................. M11x1.5x60-11.9..................................Final torque 90°

Connecting rod
Connecting rod length, piston pin bushing centre - connecting rod bearing centre ................. 196 ± 0.02 mm
Inside diameter, connecting rod eye......................................................................... Ø 44.050 - 44.066 mm
Hole for bearing shells in connecting rod (connecting rod big end)............................. Ø 74.000 - 74.019 mm
Weight difference per set of connecting rods in an engine........................................................... Max. 50 g

Connecting rod bearings


Connecting rod bearing........................................................................................... Ø 69.981 - 70.000 mm

Wall thickness of connecting rod bearing shells


Connecting rod bearing shell thickness .................. Normal ............................................. 1.975 - 1.987 mm
Connecting rod bearing shell thickness .................. Normal size 1.................................... 2.025 - 2.037 mm
Connecting rod bearing shell thickness .................. Repair level 1.................................... 2.100 - 2.112 mm
Connecting rod bearing shell spread......................................................................................Max. 1.5 mm

Piston diameter
D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.851 - 107.860 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.726 - 107.735 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above piston bottom edge....................................................107.573 - 107.564 mm

376 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Piston diameter, Nüral piston class A without cooling duct


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.866 - 107.875 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.115) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.277) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Piston diameter, Nüral piston Class B without cooling duct


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.875 - 107.884 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.115) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.277) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Piston diameter, Nüral piston class A with cooling duct


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.851 - 107.860 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.125) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.287) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Piston diameter, Nüral piston class B with cooling duct


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.860 - 107.869 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.125) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.287) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Piston diameter, KS piston class A with cooling duct


D1 measured 13 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.851 - 107.860 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.150) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.4 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.328) ± 0.010 mm

Piston diameter, KS piston class B with cooling duct


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.860 - 107.869 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.150) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.4 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.328) ± 0.010 mm

Piston height
Overall height..........................................................................................................................103.00 mm
Piston height (centre of piston pin - piston crown)............................................................ 63.85 - 63.90 mm

Piston ring (keystone ring)


Piston ring height..................................................................................................... 3 mm (nominal value)
Piston ring width ................................................................................................................ 4.25 - 4.60 mm
Ring gap ........................................................................................................................... 0.35 - 0.50 mm

Piston ring (taper faced ring)


Piston ring height............................................................................................................... 2.47 - 2.50 mm
Piston ring width ................................................................................................................ 4.20 - 4.60 mm
Ring gap ........................................................................................................................... 0.50 - 0.65 mm
Axial play .......................................................................................................................... 0.06 - 0.11 mm

Piston ring (double-bevelled ring)


Piston ring height............................................................................................................... 2.97 - 2.99 mm
Piston ring width ................................................................................................................ 3.40 - 3.65 mm
Ring gap ........................................................................................................................... 0.30 - 0.60 mm
Axial play, KS piston .......................................................................................................... 0.05 - 0.09 mm
Axial play, Nüral piston....................................................................................................... 0.03 - 0.07 mm

Piston pin
Piston pin diameter................................................................................................. Ø 43.994 - 44.000 mm
Radial play in connecting rod ......................................................................................... 0.050 - 0.072 mm
Radial play in piston ...................................................................................................... 0.006 - 0.021 mm

Piston standout
Piston standout (crankcase - piston) ............................................................................... 0.087 - 0.389 mm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 377


CRANK MECHANISM

Piston weight
Piston weight difference per set in one engine............................................................................ Max. 40 g

Important information
WARNING
Crack surfaces are sensitive. The principle involved can cause chipping
• Exchange the connecting rod if the crack surfaces are damaged
• Protect crack surfaces against damage caused by hard and sharp objects
• To clean the crack surfaces on the connecting rods, always rinse them in clean cleaning agent
• After cleaning, use compressed air to blow-dry the crack surfaces
• Do not allow rinsed-out particles to enter the engine
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
The piston diameter is always measured perpendicular to the piston pin bore.
Pistons are identied with A or B.

Special tools

[163] Piston ring pliers 83.09144-6090

• Removing and installing piston rings

[164] Feeler gauge 08.75310-0806

• Checking the piston ring axial play and ring play

[165] Dial gauge 08.71000-3217

• Checking the piston pin bushing


• Checking the piston standout in conjunction with:
• Dial gauge stand [166]

[166] Dial gauge stand 80.99605-0172

• Checking the piston standout

[167] Piston ring compressor 80.99613-0039

• Installing the piston

378 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

[168] Setting tool 80.99622-0052

• Aligning the connecting rod bearing shells

[169] Depth gauge (electronic) 08.71195-9003

• Checking the piston ring insertion depth

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 379


CRANK MECHANISM

Removing pistons and connecting rods Removing and checking the piston
Removing the connecting rod bearing cap Removing the piston pin

WARNING • Mark the relative positions of the piston (3), piston


Crack surfaces are sensitive. The pin (2) and connecting rod (5)
principle involved can cause chipping • Detach the circlips (1) and (4)
• Exchange the connecting rod if the • Press the piston pin (2) out of the piston (3)
crack surfaces are damaged • Remove the piston (3) from the connecting rod (5)
• Protect crack surfaces against damage
Checking the piston pin diameter
caused by hard and sharp objects

• Mark the connecting rod bearing cap (2) and


connecting rod bearing shells (1) to indicate
correct assignment and installation position
• Unscrew the connecting rod bearing bolts (3)
• Remove the connecting rod bearing cap (2)
with connecting rod bearing shell (1) from the
crankshaft
• Push the piston and connecting rod out in the
direction of the cylinder head

Removing the piston

• Check the diameter of the piston pin (1) using a


micrometer (2)
The permitted diameter of the piston pin (1) is
Ø 43.994 - 44.000 mm.

If the diameter is out of tolerance, t a new piston


with piston pin (1).

• Extract the piston (1) with connecting rod from the


crankcase (2)
• Mark the connecting rod and connecting rod
bearing shell to indicate their installation position
and assignment
• Remove the connecting rod bearing shell from the
connecting rod

380 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Checking the piston ring axial play Checking the piston ring gap

Note Note
An axial play cannot be measured on the The ring gap is only allowed to be
keystone ring. checked if the piston bore has the correct
inside diameter, otherwise a false ring
• Measure the axial play between the piston rings gap reading would be obtained.
(1) and (2) and the piston (3) using the Feeler Check the piston bore inside diameter.
gauge [164] (4)
The permitted taper-face ring (1) axial play is • Insert the piston ring (3) evenly deep into the piston
0.06 - 0.11 mm. bore (1)
• Check even insertion depth of the piston ring (3)
The permissible axial play on the double-bevelled using Depth gauge (electronic) [169]
ring (2) is 0.05 - 0.09 mm for KS pistons and • Use the Feeler gauge [164] (2) to check the ring
0.03 - 0.07 mm for Nüral pistons. gap
The permitted keystone ring gap is 0.35 - 0.50 mm.
If the axial plays are out of tolerance, t a new piston
(3) with piston rings (1), (2) and keystone ring. The permitted taper-face ring gap is 0.50 - 0.65 mm.

Removing the piston rings The permitted double-bevelled ring gap is 0.30 - 0.60
mm.

If the ring gaps are out of tolerance, t new piston


rings.

• Set the Piston ring pliers [163] (1) to the piston


diameter
• Detach the piston rings (2) from the piston (3)
using Piston ring pliers [163] (1)
• Carefully clean the piston ring grooves

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 381


CRANK MECHANISM

Checking the connecting rods and Checking the connecting rod bearing inside
connecting rod bearings diameter

Checking the connecting rod bearing shell


spread

• Insert the upper connecting rod bearing shell into


the connecting rod (2) as marked
• Insert the lower connecting rod bearing shell into
the connecting rod bearing cap (3) as marked
Note
• Screw in the connecting rod bearing bolts and
The difference between dimension A and
tighten them to Initial torque 55 Nm
dimension B gives the connecting rod
• Use the Dial gauge [165] (4) with the internal
bearing shell spread.
calliper (1) to check the connecting rod bearing
inside diameter
• Clean the connecting rod bearing shells (2) and
The permitted inside diameter of the connecting rod
put them together on a at surface as marked
bearing is Ø 69.981 - 70.000 mm.
• Check dimension A using a micrometer (1)
• Check dimension B using a micrometer (1) If the inside diameter is out of tolerance, t new
The permissible spread of the connecting rod connecting rod bearing shells.
bearing shells (2) is Max. 1.5 mm.

If the spread is out of tolerance, t new connecting


rod bearing shells (2).

Checking the piston pin bushing

• Use the internal calliper (3) and Dial gauge [165]


(2) to check the piston pin bushing inside diameter
The permitted piston pin bushing inside diameter is
Ø 44.050 - 44.066 mm.

If the inside diameter is out of tolerance, t a new


connecting rod (1).

382 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Installing pistons and connecting rods Installing the piston pin

Installing the piston rings

• Attach a new circlip (4) in the groove in the piston


(3)
WARNING • Fit the piston (3) over the connecting rod (5) as
Piston rings can break marked
• Install piston rings using correctly set • Thinly apply clean engine oil on the piston pin (2)
piston ring pliers • Push the piston pin (2) through the piston (3) and
the connecting rod (5) as marked until the stop is
• Set the Piston ring pliers [163] (1) to the piston reached
diameter • Attach a new circlip (1) in the groove in the piston
• Use the Piston ring pliers [163] (1) to insert the (3)
piston rings (2) into the corresponding ring groove • Check that the circlips (1) and (4) are seated
in the piston (3), ensuring that the TOP mark is correctly
facing the piston crown If the circlips (1) and (4) have not engaged correctly,
remove and re-attach the circlips (1) and (4),
ensuring that they are seated correctly.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 383


CRANK MECHANISM

Piston installation with piston ring compressor Mounting the connecting rod bearing cap
band

WARNING
Note Crack surfaces are sensitive. The
There is an installation arrow on the principle involved can cause chipping
piston surface. This must point towards • Exchange the connecting rod if the
the coolant pump during installation. crack surfaces are damaged
• Protect crack surfaces against damage
• Move the crankshaft for the cylinder concerned to caused by hard and sharp objects
TDC
• Line up the gaps in the piston rings at 120° offset • Insert the lower connecting rod bearing shell (1)
to one another into the connecting rod bearing cap (2)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the upper • Check the alignment of the lower connecting rod
connecting rod bearing shell bearing shell (1) and, if necessary, adjust with
• Insert the upper connecting rod bearing shell into Setting tool [168]
the connecting rod • Thinly apply clean engine oil on the lower
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the piston (1) connecting rod bearing shell (1)
• Place the Piston ring compressor [167] (2) onto • Position the connecting rod bearing cap (2) on the
the piston (1) and clamp connecting rod as marked
• Push the piston (1) with connecting rod into the • Screw in the new connecting rod bearing bolts (3)
piston bore until the piston (1) has been pushed and tighten to Initial torque 55 Nm
out of the Piston ring compressor [167] (2) • Tighten the connecting rod bearing bolts (3) to
• Push in the piston (1) until the connecting rod Final torque 90°
with connecting rod bearing shell is lying on the
crankshaft

384 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Checking the piston standout

• Move the piston (2) to TDC


• Mount the Dial gauge [165] (3) with the Dial gauge
stand [166] (5)
• Locate the dial gauge tip (1) on the crankcase (4)
and zero the Dial gauge [165] (3)
• Locate the dial gauge tip (1) on the piston (2) and
read off the difference (piston standout)
The permitted piston standout is 0.087 - 0.389 mm.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 385


CRANK MECHANISM

CRANKSHAFT
Removing and installing the crankshaft
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with single-stage charging), see 213
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361
– Removing and installing the starter, see 119
– Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox, see 365
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, injectors and rail, see 135
– Removing and installing the injectors and rail, see 139
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 153
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 155
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 167
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 169
– Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal, see 399
– Removing and installing the timing case cover, see 431
– Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant), see 267
– Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant), see 249
– Removing and installing the air distributor pipe, see 243
– Removing and installing the rocker arm mechanism, see 277
– Removing and installing the cylinder head, see 285
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339
– Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55), see 427
– Removing and installing the timing gears, see 323
– Removing and installing the timing case, see 435
– Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal, see 403
– Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant without power take-off), see 415
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 441
– Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 300 Nm), see 418
– Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 600 Nm), see 423
– Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods, see 375
– Checking and setting the valve clearance, see 292

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 387


CRANK MECHANISM

(1) Crankshaft bearing shell (5) Thrust washer


(2) Crankshaft bearing shell (6) Crankshaft
(3) Bearing cap (7) Thrust washer
(4) Mounting bolt (8) Crankcase

Technical data
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M14x118-10.9 ...............................Initial torque 115 Nm
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M14x118-10.9 ......................................Final torque 90°

Crankshaft
Hardness, crankshaft (6)......................................................................................................... 53 ± 3 HRC
Permitted curvature of journals...................................................................................................0.004 mm
Axial play, crankshaft (6) ................................................................................................ 0.200 - 0.395 mm
Connecting rod bearing journal................................................................................ Ø 69.981 - 70.000 mm
Crankshaft bearing journal ...................................................................................... Ø 86.981 - 87.000 mm

Crankshaft bearing
Crankshaft bearing inside diameter ......................................................................... Ø 89.520 - 89.554 mm
Wall thickness of crankshaft bearing shells (1), (2) .......................................................... 2.468 - 2.480 mm
Wall thickness, thrust washers (5), (7) ............................................................................ 2.850 - 2.900 mm
Crankshaft bearing spread ....................................................................................................Max. 1.5 mm

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

388 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Special tools

[170] Locating pin 80.99605-0197

• Checking the crankshaft axial play in conjunction


with:
• Dial gauge [171]
• Dial gauge stand [172]

[171] Dial gauge 08.71000-3217

• Checking the crankshaft axial play

[172] Dial gauge stand 08.71082-0005

• Checking the crankshaft axial play

[173] Socket, size 22 80.99612-0024

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts in conjunction with:
• Support [175]
• Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.5 [174]
• Torque angle gauge [176]
• Stop pin [177]
• Pan head screw [178]
• Connecting pin [179]
• Rubber ring 42 mm [180]
• Washer [181]
[174] Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.5 80.99619-0007

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[175] Support 80.99606-0551

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[176] Torque angle gauge 80.99607-0172

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 389


CRANK MECHANISM

[177] Stop pin 80.99606-0585

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[178] Pan head screw 06.02191-0407

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[179] Connecting pin 06.22729-0006

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[180] Rubber ring 42 mm 08.06142-9006

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[181] Washer 80.99609-0033

• Undoing and tightening the bearing cap mounting


bolts

[182] Setting tool 80.99622-0052

• Aligning the crankshaft bearing shells

390 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Removing the crankshaft Undoing the bearing cap mounting bolts

Checking the crankshaft axial play

• Place the special tool (1) onto the mounting bolt


that is going to be undone
• Mount the Dial gauge stand [172] (2) with the Dial • Undo all the mounting bolts
gauge [171] (1) and the Locating pin [170]
• Position the Locating pin [170] on the crankshaft Removing the bearing cap
(3) with a preload
• Push the crankshaft (3) horizontally into the end
position towards the ywheel housing
• Zero the Dial gauge [171] (1)
• Pull the crankshaft (3) into the end position,
towards Dial gauge [171] (1), and read off the
difference
The permitted axial play on the crankshaft (3) is
0.200 - 0.395 mm.

If the axial play is out of tolerance, install new thrust


washers.

Assembling the special tool

• Mark the bearing cap (2) to indicate its installation


position and correct assignment
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Remove the bearing cap (2)
• Mark the crankshaft bearing shell (3) to indicate its
installation position and correct assignment and
then remove it
• Repeat the work step for bearing caps 2, 3, 5 and
7

• Insert the Torque multiplier i = 1 : 3.5 [174] (1) into


the Support [175] (2)
• Mount the Stop pin [177] (5) with Pan head
screw [178] (4) and Washer [181] (3) on the
Support [175] (2)
• Put the Torque angle gauge [176] (9) on the Torque
multiplier i = 1 : 3.5 [174] (1)
• Put the Socket, size 22 [173] (7) on the Torque
multiplier i = 1 : 3.5 [174] (1) and secure with the
Connecting pin [179] (8) and the Rubber ring 42
mm [180] (6)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 391


CRANK MECHANISM

Removing the bearing cap axial washers Removing the crankshaft

CAUTION
Danger of injury due to heavy
components
• Remove the crankshaft with support
WARNING
Component damage due to unsuitable
lifting gear
• Do not use steel cables or other
sharp-edged tools to lift out the
crankshaft

• Lift the crankshaft (2) out of the crankcase (1)


• Mark the crankshaft bearing shells to indicate their
• Mark the bearing cap (2) to indicate its installation installation position and correct assignment and
position and correct assignment then remove them from the crankcase (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (3)
• Remove the bearing cap (2) with thrust washers
(1) and (4)
• Mark the crankshaft bearing shells to indicate their
installation position and correct assignment and
then remove them

Removing the upper thrust washers

• Remove the thrust washers (2) from bearing seat


4 (1)

392 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Checking the crankshaft and crankshaft Checking the crankshaft bearing inside diameter
bearings
Checking the crankshaft bearing spread

• Insert the upper and lower crankshaft bearing shell


into the bearing seat as marked
• Fit the bearing cap (3) as marked
Note • Screw in the mounting bolts for the bearing cap (3)
The difference between dimension A and and tighten them to Initial torque 115 Nm
dimension B is the spread or expansion • Use the internal calliper (2) and Dial gauge [171]
of the crankshaft bearings. (1) to check the crankshaft bearing
• Repeat the check several times at 120° offset
• Clean the crankshaft bearing shells (2) and put • Remove the bearing cap (3) again after the check
them together on a at surface as marked The permitted crankshaft bearing inside diameter is
• Check dimension A using a micrometer (1) Ø 89.520 - 89.554 mm.
• Check dimension B using a micrometer (1)
If the inside diameter is out of tolerance, t new
The permitted spread of the camshaft bearings is
crankshaft bearing shells.
Max. 1.5 mm.
Checking the outside diameter of the connecting
If the spread is out of tolerance, t new crankshaft
rod bearing journal
bearing shells (2).

• Clean the crankshaft connecting rod bearing


journal (2)
• Check the connecting rod bearing journal using a
micrometer (1)
• Repeat the check several times at 120° offset
The permitted outside diameter of the connecting
rod bearing journal is Ø 69.981 - 70.000 mm.

If the outside diameter is out of tolerance, t a new


crankshaft (2).

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 393


CRANK MECHANISM

Installing the crankshaft Installing the bearing cap axial washers

Installing the crankshaft

WARNING
Component damage due to unsuitable
lifting gear
• Do not use steel cables or other
sharp-edged tools to lift in the
crankshaft

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the crankshaft


bearing shells
• Insert the crankshaft bearing shells into the
bearing seats as marked and align with the
Setting tool [182]
• Insert the crankshaft (2) into the crankcase (1) • Thinly apply clean engine oil on the crankshaft
bearing shell and thrust washers (1) and (4)
Installing the upper thrust washers • Insert the crankshaft bearing shell into the bearing
cap (2) as marked and align with the Setting
tool [182]
• Insert the thrust washers (1) and (4) into the
bearing cap (2) with the oil grooves facing the
crankshaft
• Fit the bearing cap (2) with thrust washers (1) and
(4) on bearing seat 4
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (3) and tighten
them by hand

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the thrust washers


(2)
• Insert the thrust washers (2) at bearing seat 4 with
the oil grooves facing the crankshaft (1)
• Insert the thrust washers (2) into the bearing seat
by pressing lightly

394 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANK MECHANISM

Mounting the bearing cap

• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the crankshaft


bearing shell (3)
• Insert the crankshaft bearing shell (3) into the
bearing cap (2) as marked and align with the
Setting tool [182]
• Fit the bearing cap (2)
• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the contact
surface for the heads of the new mounting bolts
(1)
• Screw in the mounting bolts (1) and tighten them
by hand

Tightening the bearing cap mounting bolts

Note
Note the ratio: Torque multiplier i = 1 :
3.5 [174].

• Tighten the mounting bolts to Initial torque 115 Nm


using the special tool (1)
• Tighten the mounting bolts to Final torque 90°
using the special tool (1)
• Check the crankshaft for ease of movement
If the crankshaft cannot be turned or only turned
with difculty, remove the crankshaft with crankshaft
bearings.

Recheck the crankshaft bearings and the crankshaft


and, if necessary, t a new crankshaft or crankshaft
bearings.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 395


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

(1) Timing case cover (4) Rear crankshaft oil seal


(2) Timing case (5) Front crankshaft oil seal
(3) Flywheel housing

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 397


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS


Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361

(1) Timing case cover (3) crankshaft oil seal


(2) Timing case

Important information
WARNING
PTFE sealing rings are rendered unusable if they come into contact with oil or grease before
installation
• Clean the crankshaft and insertion tool before assembly
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 399


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

Special tools

[183] Guide plate 80.99606-0568

• Removing the front crankshaft oil seal in


conjunction with:
• Threaded spindle [185]
• Hexagon nut [186]
• Crossmember [187]
• Pressure plate [188]
• Hook [189]
• Pan head screw [184]
• Installing the front crankshaft oil seal in
conjunction with:
• Threaded spindle [185]
• Hexagon nut [186]
• Hexagon collar nut [190]
• Installer sleeve [191]
• Pan head screw [184]
[184] Pan head screw 06.02191-2713

• Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil


seal

[185] Threaded spindle 80.99606-0299

• Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil


seal

[186] Hexagon nut 06.11065-2318

• Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil


seal

[187] Crossmember 80.99606-0298

• Removing the front crankshaft oil seal

[188] Pressure plate 80.99609-0038

• Removing the front crankshaft oil seal

400 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

[189] Hook 80.99606-6013

• Removing the front crankshaft oil seal

[190] Hexagon collar nut 06.11222-0311

• Installing the front crankshaft oil seal

[191] Installer sleeve 80.99606-0567

• Installing the front crankshaft oil seal

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 401


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

Removing the crankshaft oil seal Installing the crankshaft oil seal
Positioning the crankshaft oil seal

• Mount the Guide plate [183] (2) on the crankshaft


with the Pan head screw [184] (6)
• Screw the Pressure plate [188] into the Guide • Remove the Pressure plate [188]
plate [183] (2) • Place the new crankshaft oil seal (3) with transport
• Screw the Hexagon nut [186] (5) onto the sleeve (2) onto the Guide plate [183] (1)
Threaded spindle [185] and secure with a second • Push the crankshaft oil seal (3) onto the Guide
Hexagon nut [186] (5) plate [183] (1)
• Screw the Threaded spindle [185] into the • Remove the transport sleeve (2)
Crossmember [187] (4)
• Insert the Hook [189] (3) through the Pressing in the crankshaft oil seal
Crossmember [187] (4) at between the
crankshaft oil seal (1) and the crankshaft
• Turn the Hook [189] (3) through 90° so that the
recess of the Hook [189] (3) is facing outwards
• Extract the crankshaft oil seal (1) by screwing in
the Threaded spindle [185]

• Push the Installer sleeve [191] (2) onto the Guide


plate [183]
• Screw the Hexagon collar nut [190] onto the
Threaded spindle [185] (3)
• Screw the Threaded spindle [185] (3) into the
Guide plate [183]
• Press in the crankshaft oil seal (1) until the stop
is reached by screwing in the Hexagon collar
nut [190]

402 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox, see 365

(1) Flywheel housing (2) Crankshaft oil seal

Important information
WARNING
PTFE sealing rings are rendered unusable if they come into contact with oil or grease before
installation
• Clean the crankshaft and insertion tool before assembly
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 403


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

Special tools

[192] Guide plate 80.99606-0316

• Removing rear crankshaft oil seal in conjunction


with:
• Crossmember [196]
• Hook [197]
• Pan head screw [194]
• Threaded spindle [193]
• Hexagon nut [195]
• Pressure plate [198]
• Installing rear crankshaft oil seal in conjunction
with:
• Hexagon collar nut [200]
• Installer sleeve [199]
• Pan head screw [194]
• Threaded spindle [193]
• Hexagon nut [195]
[193] Threaded spindle 80.99606-0299

• Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil


seal

[194] Pan head screw 06.02191-2713

• Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil


seal

[195] Hexagon nut 06.11065-2318

• Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil


seal

[196] Crossmember 80.99606-0298

• Removing the rear crankshaft oil seal

[197] Hook 80.99606-6013

• Removing the rear crankshaft oil seal

404 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

[198] Pressure plate 80.99609-0038

• Removing the rear crankshaft oil seal

[199] Installer sleeve 80.99606-0315

• Installing the rear crankshaft oil seal

[200] Hexagon collar nut 06.11222-0311

• Installing the rear crankshaft oil seal

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 405


CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

Removing the crankshaft oil seal Installing the crankshaft oil seal
Mounting the special tool Positioning the crankshaft oil seal

• Mount the Guide plate [192] (4) on the crankshaft • Remove the Pressure plate [198]
with the Pan head screw [194] (6) • Unscrew the Pan head screw [194]
• Screw the Pressure plate [198] (5) into the Guide • Position the new crankshaft oil seal (1) with
plate [192] (4) transport sleeve (2) on the Guide plate [192] (3)
• Screw the Hexagon nut [195] onto the Threaded • Push the crankshaft oil seal (1) onto the Guide
spindle [193] and secure with a second Hexagon plate [192] (3)
nut [195] • Remove the transport sleeve (2)
• Screw the Threaded spindle [193] into the • Screw in the Pan head screw [194]
Crossmember [196] (2)
• Insert the Hook [197] (1) through the Pressing in the crankshaft oil seal
Crossmember [196] (2) at between the
crankshaft oil seal (3) and the crankshaft
• Turn the Hook [197] (1) through 90° so that the
recess of the Hook [197] (1) is facing outwards
• Insert the Crossmember [196] (2) into the
Hook [197] (1)

Extracting the crankshaft oil seal

WARNING
Component damage caused by
incorrect installation
• Ensure that the special tool is tted with
the recess downwards, above the curve
on the ywheel housing

• Push the Installer sleeve [199] (2) onto the Guide


• Extract the crankshaft oil seal (1) by screwing in
plate [192] with the recess facing downwards
the Threaded spindle [193] (2)
• Screw the Hexagon collar nut [200] (1) onto the
Threaded spindle [193]
• Screw the Threaded spindle [193] into the Guide
plate [192]
• Press in the crankshaft oil seal (3) until the stop
is reached by screwing in the Hexagon collar
nut [200] (1)

406 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

ENGINE HOUSING

(1) Oil separator (5) Crankcase


(2) Mounting bolt (6) Timing case
(3) O-ring (7) Timing case cover
(4) Flywheel housing (8) Sealing ring

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 407


ENGINE HOUSING

CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53)

(1) Insulating hose (8) Sealing ring


(2) Jubilee clip (9) Mounting bolt
(3) Vent line with pipe clamp (to intake (10) Oil return line
manifold) (11) Holder
(4) Oil return line (12) Mounting bolt
(5) O-ring (13) Oil separator with pressure control valve
(6) Vent line (14) Jubilee clip
(7) O-ring (15) Hose

Technical data
Oil return line (4)................................................... M24x1.5 ............................................................. 4 Nm

Service products
Loctite 242 sealing compound ............................................................................................ 04.90300-9025

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 409


ENGINE HOUSING

Note
Unlock and pull off the vent line (6) and the oil return line (10) by pressing together the spring
shackles (arrow).
New mounting bolts (9) and (11) must be tted.
New O-rings (5) and (6) and a new sealing ring (8) must be tted.
Apply Loctite 242 sealing compound on the thread of the oil return line (4) and tighten to 4 Nm.

Special tools

[201] Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips 80.99625-0073

• Removing and installing the jubilee clips

410 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55)

(1) Mounting bolt (10) Mounting bolt


(2) Vent line (11) O-ring
(3) Jubilee clip (12) Vent line
(4) Oil return line (13) Mounting bolt
(5) Oil return line (14) Jubilee clip
(6) Sealing ring (15) Hose
(7) Hose (16) Oil separator
(8) Jubilee clip (17) Jubilee clip
(9) Sealing ring (18) Hose

Technical data
Oil return line (4)................................................... M24x1.5 ............................................................. 4 Nm

Service products
Loctite 242 sealing compound ............................................................................................ 04.90300-9025

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque.
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 411


ENGINE HOUSING

Note
Fit new mounting bolts, sealing rings and O-rings.
Also t new hoses if exchanging the crankcase ventilation.
Thinly apply Loctite 242 sealing compound on the thread of the oil return line (in oil sump).

Special tools

[202] Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips 80.99625-0073

• Removing and installing the jubilee clips

412 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63)

(1) Vent line (6) Jubilee clip


(2) Oil separator (7) Hose
(3) Hose (8) Jubilee clip
(4) Hose (9) Ventilation housing
(5) Vent line (10) Oil return line

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
In order to remove and install the ventilation housing, it is also necessary to remove and install the
turbocharger, see Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging with
intercooler), 229.
Note
Fit new hoses, mounting bolts, sealing rings and O-rings when exchanging the crankcase
ventilation.

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 413


ENGINE HOUSING

Special tools

[203] Hose clamp pliers for jubilee clips 80.99625-0073

• Removing and installing the jubilee clips

414 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

FLYWHEEL HOUSING
Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant without power take-off)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the starter, see 119
– Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox, see 365
– Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal, see 403

(1) Crankcase (5) Mounting bolt


(2) Mounting bolt (6) Mounting bolt
(3) Cap (7) Gasket
(4) Flywheel housing

Technical data
Mounting bolt (5) .................................................. M14x105-10.9..................................................170 Nm
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M12x30-10.9....................................................105 Nm

Service products
Curil T sealing compound .................................................................................................. 04.90300-9030

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 415


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the ywheel housing Installing the ywheel housing


Removing the speed sensor Positioning the ywheel housing

• Disconnect the electrical connection for the speed • Fit the ywheel housing (3) with a new gasket
sensor (1) (2) and position it over the alignment pins on the
• Remove the speed sensor (1) from the ywheel crankcase (1)
housing (2)
Screwing in the mounting bolts
Unscrewing the mounting bolts

• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) and (2)


• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) and (2) • Tighten the mounting bolts (2) to 105 Nm
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1) to 170 Nm
Removing the ywheel housing

• Remove the ywheel housing (3) with gasket (2)


from the crankcase (1)
• Clean the mating faces

416 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Installing the speed sensor

• Thinly apply Curil T sealing compound on the


contact surfaces of the speed sensor (1)
• Install the speed sensor (1) in the ywheel housing
(2)
• Connect the electrical connection for the speed
sensor (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 417


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 300 Nm)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the starter, see 119
– Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox, see 365
– Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal, see 403
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 441

(1) Plate (4) Intermediate gear pin


(2) Flywheel housing (5) Intermediate gear
(3) Thrust washers (6) Crankshaft gear

Service products
Curil T sealing compound .................................................................................................. 04.90300-9030
Loctite 573 sealing compound ............................................................................................ 04.10160-9249

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

418 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the ywheel housing Removing the ywheel housing

Removing the speed sensor

CAUTION
• Disconnect the electrical connection for the speed Danger of injury due to heavy
sensor (1) components
• Remove the speed sensor (1) from the ywheel • Use lifting gear to remove the ywheel
housing (2) housing

Unscrewing the mounting bolts • Remove the ywheel housing (3) with gasket (2)
from the crankcase (1)
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the crankshaft gear

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Mark the installation position of the crankshaft
gear (1)
• Pull the crankshaft gear (1) off the crankshaft
• Clean the contact surfaces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 419


ENGINE HOUSING

Dismantling the ywheel housing Assembling the ywheel housing


Removing the plate Mounting the intermediate gears

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(2) and (3)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (2) and (3)
• Remove the plate (1)

Removing the intermediate gears

Note
The thrust washer grooves must be facing
the intermediate gear pins.

• Position the thrust washers (4) as marked


• Thinly apply clean engine oil on the intermediate
gear pins (2)
• Position the intermediate gears (1) and
intermediate gear pins (2) as marked
• Position the thrust washers (3) as marked

• Mark the intermediate gears (1), intermediate gear


pins (2) and thrust washers (3) and (4) to indicate
their installation position and assignment
• Remove the thrust washers (3)
• Remove the intermediate gears (1) and
intermediate gear pins (2)
• Remove the thrust washers (4)

420 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Mounting the plate Installing the ywheel housing


Mounting the crankshaft gear

• Position the plate (1)


• Screw in the new mounting bolts (2) and (3) as
marked • Thinly apply Loctite 573 sealing compound on the
• Tighten the mounting bolts (2) and (3) contact surfaces of the crankshaft gear (1)
• Push the crankshaft gear (1) onto the crankshaft
as marked

Positioning the ywheel housing

CAUTION
Danger of injury due to heavy
components
• Use lifting gear to install the ywheel
housing

• Fit the ywheel housing (3) with a new gasket


(2) and position it over the alignment pins on the
crankcase (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 421


ENGINE HOUSING

Screwing in the mounting bolts

• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) as marked


• Tighten the mounting bolts (1)

Installing the speed sensor

• Thinly apply Curil T sealing compound on the


contact surfaces of the speed sensor (1)
• Install the speed sensor (1) in the ywheel housing
(2)
• Connect the electrical connection for the speed
sensor (1)

422 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 600 Nm)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the starter, see 119
– Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox, see 365
– Removing and installing the rear crankshaft oil seal, see 403
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 441

(1) Gasket (7) Mounting bolt


(2) Mounting bolt (8) Mounting bolt
(3) Mounting bolt (9) Flywheel housing
(4) Gasket (10) Intermediate gear pin
(5) Mounting bolt (11) Intermediate gear
(6) Mounting bolt (12) Plate

Technical data
Speed sensor, crankshaft...................................... M6x16-10.9 ........................................................ 8 Nm

Service products
Omnit sealing compound.................................................................................................. 04.10160-9249

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 423


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the ywheel housing Removing the ywheel housing

Removing the speed sensor

CAUTION
• Disconnect the electrical connection for the speed Danger of injury due to heavy
sensor (1) components
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (2) • Use lifting gear to remove the ywheel
• Remove the speed sensor (1) from the ywheel housing
housing
• Remove the ywheel housing (3) with gasket (2)
Unscrewing the mounting bolts from the crankcase (1)
• Clean the mating faces

Removing the crankshaft gear

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) and (6)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
and (6) • Mark the installation position of the crankshaft
gear (1)
• Detach the circlip
• Remove the deep-groove ball bearing
• Pull the crankshaft gear (1) off the crankshaft
• Clean the contact surfaces

424 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the intermediate gear Installing the ywheel housing


Mounting the plate

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the intermediate gear (3) and the
intermediate gear pin (2) • Fit a new gasket (3)
• Position the plate (2)
Removing the plate • Screw in and tighten the new mounting bolts (1)

Mounting the intermediate gear

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)


• Remove the plate (2) and the gasket (3)
• Clean the mating faces • Position the intermediate gear (3) with the
intermediate gear pin (2)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 425


ENGINE HOUSING

Mounting the crankshaft gear Screwing in the mounting bolts

• Thinly apply Omnit sealing compound on the • Screw in the new mounting bolts (1), (2), (3), (4),
contact surfaces of the crankshaft gear (1) (5) and (6) as marked
• Push the crankshaft gear (1) onto the crankshaft • Tighten the mounting bolts (1), (2), (3), (4), (5) and
as marked (6)
• Install the deep-groove ball bearing
• Attach the circlip Installing the speed sensor

Positioning the ywheel housing

• Fit a new O-ring on the speed sensor (1)


• Insert the speed sensor (1) into the ywheel
housing
CAUTION
• Screw in the mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 8 Nm
Danger of injury due to heavy
components
• Connect the electrical connection for the speed
• Use lifting gear to install the ywheel
sensor (1)
housing

• Position the ywheel housing (3) with a new gasket


(2) over the alignment pins on the crankcase (1)

426 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

CRANKCASE YOKE
Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55)
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339

(1) Crankcase yoke (3) Mounting bolt


(2) Crankcase

Service products
Loctite 5900 sealing compound .......................................................................................... 04.10394-9292

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 427


ENGINE HOUSING

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench
Note
No crankcase yoke is tted in the D0836 LFL60 and LFL63 engine variants. An oil sump upper
section is tted instead, see Removing and installing the oil sump upper section (Euro 5 and EEV
variant), 347.

428 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the crankcase yoke Installing the crankcase yoke

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Thinly apply Loctite 5900 sealing compound on
• Remove the crankcase yoke (2) from the the contact surfaces of the crankcase (3)
crankcase (3) • Position the crankcase yoke (2) on the crankcase
• Clean the mating faces (3)
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 429


ENGINE HOUSING

TIMING CASE COVER/TIMING CASE


Removing and installing the timing case cover
Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361
– Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal, see 399

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 431


ENGINE HOUSING

(1) Timing case (4) Mounting bolt


(2) Mounting bolt (5) Timing case cover
(3) Oil ller neck (6) Gasket

Technical data
Oil ller neck (3) ................................................... M38x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm

Service products
Curil T sealing compound .................................................................................................. 04.90300-9030

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

Special tools

[204] Socket, 27 mm 08.06556-9300

• Removing and installing the oil ller neck

432 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the timing case cover Removing the timing case cover gasket

Removing the speed sensor

• Remove the gasket (1) from the timing case (2)


• Clean the mating faces
• Disconnect the electrical connection for the speed
sensor (1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolt (2)
• Pull out the speed sensor (1)
• Remove the O-ring from the speed sensor (1)

Removing the timing case cover

• Unscrew the oil ller neck (4) using the Socket, 27


mm [204]
• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts
(1), (2) and (5)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1), (2) and (5)
• Remove the timing case cover (3)

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 433


ENGINE HOUSING

Installing the timing case cover Installing the speed sensor

Positioning the timing case cover gasket

• Insert the speed sensor (1) with a new O-ring


• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolt (2)
• Position the new gasket (1) over the alignment • Connect the electrical connection for the speed
pins on the timing case (2) sensor (1)

Mounting the timing case cover

• Position the timing case cover (3) over the


alignment pins
• Screw in the mounting bolts (1), (2) and (5) as
marked and then tighten them
• Thinly apply Curil T sealing compound on the
thread of the oil ller neck (4)
• Screw in the oil ller neck (4) using the Socket, 27
mm [204] and tighten to 35 Nm

434 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing and installing the timing case


Additional jobs
– Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725), see 49
– Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump), see 81
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive, see 86
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive, see 89
– Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller), see 93
– Removing and installing the alternator, see 107
– Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator, see 115
– Removing and installing the refrigerant compressor, see 123
– Removing and installing the hydraulic pump, see 127
– Removing and installing the power take-off, see 73
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53), see 409
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55), see 411
– Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL60/63), see 413
– Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler), see 218
– Removing and installing the 1-cylinder air compressor, see 77
– Protective sleeves, ame start system, see 193
– Removing and installing the ame start system, see 195
– Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing, see 57
– Removing and installing the coolant manifold, see 53
– Removing and installing the coolant pump, see 61
– Removing and installing the vibration damper, see 361
– Protective sleeves, fuel service centre, see 177
– Removing and installing the fuel service centre, see 180
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 153
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3), see 155
– Protective sleeves, high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 167
– Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH), see 169
– Removing and installing the timing case cover, see 431
– Removing and installing the front crankshaft oil seal, see 399
– Removing and installing the timing gears, see 323
– Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant), see 339
– Removing and installing the crankcase yoke (variant LFL50-55), see 427

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 435


ENGINE HOUSING

(1) Timing case (2) Gasket

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50 % of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

436 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


ENGINE HOUSING

Removing the timing case Installing the timing case


Removing the timing case Positioning the timing case gasket

• Position the new gasket (1) over the alignment


Note
pins on the crankcase (2)
To move the timing case, it may be
necessary to remove and install the oil Mounting the timing case
pump, see Removing and installing the
oil pump, 351.

• Mark the installation position of the mounting bolts


(1)
• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1)
• Pull the timing case (2) off the crankcase (3)

Removing the timing case gasket

• Fit new oil pump coupling sleeve O-rings and thinly


apply clean engine oil, see Mounting the oil pump,
354
• Align the oil pump coupling sleeve with the
crankcase (3)
• Position the timing case (2) over the alignment
pins
• Screw in the new mounting bolts (1) as marked
and tighten them by hand
• Remove the gasket (1) from the crankcase (2)
• Tighten the mounting bolts (1)
• Clean the mating faces

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 437


POWER TAKE-OFF

POWER TAKE-OFF

(1) Mounting bolt (2) Power take-off

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 439


POWER TAKE-OFF

POWER TAKE-OFF
Removing and installing the power take-off

(1) Mounting bolt (2) Power take-off

Important information
WARNING
Component damage due to incorrectly tightened screw/bolt connections
• If impact wrenches are used, these may only be used for pretightening to max. 50% of the
specied tightening torque
• Final tightening must always be performed manually using a torque wrench

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 441


POWER TAKE-OFF

Removing the power take-off Installing the power take-off

• Unscrew the mounting bolts (1) • Thinly apply clean engine oil on a new O-ring (3)
• Pull the power take-off (2) with O-ring (3) out of and t it on the power take-off (2)
the ywheel housing • Insert the power take-off (2) into the ywheel
housing
• Screw in and tighten the mounting bolts (1)

442 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TECHNICAL DATA

TECHNICAL DATA

Removing and installing the wiring harness


Cable socket mounting nut.................................... M5 ..................................................................... 5 Nm
Terminal B + mounting nut .................................... M8 ....................................................................13 Nm

Removing and installing the engine electrics


Mounting bolt, speed sensor (1) ............................ M6x16-8.8 .......................................................... 8 Nm
Oil level sensor (2)................................................ M22x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Flame glow plug (3) .............................................. M20x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Temperature sensor (4)......................................... M16x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Temperature sensor (5)......................................... M16x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Mounting bolt, speed sensor (7) ............................ M6x16-8.8 .......................................................... 8 Nm
Pressure sensor (9) .............................................. M18x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Rail-pressure sensor (10)...................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................70 Nm
Pressure transmitter (11)....................................... M18x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Mounting bolts, charge-pressure sensor (13) ......... M6x16-10.9 .......................................................10 Nm

Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 704)


Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x20-10.9 .......................................................20 Nm

Removing and installing the fan (variant DMR 725)


Mounting nut (4) ................................................... M8-8 .................................................................22 Nm

Removing and installing the coolant manifold


Thermostat opening temperature...................................................................................................... 83 °C

Removing and installing the thermostat with thermostat housing


Bulkhead tting (5)................................................ M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm
Opening temperature of thermostat (4) ............................................................................................. 83 °C

Removing and installing the coolant pump


Bulkhead tting (6)................................................ M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm

Dismantling and assembling the coolant pump


Projection of slide ring seal (2) ........................................................................................... 10.0 - 10.4 mm
Dimension, impeller (cast iron) (3) - coolant pump housing (1) ......................................... 33.60 - 33.80 mm
Dimension, impeller (plastic) (3) - coolant pump housing (1) ............................................ 33.10 - 33.30 mm

Removing and installing the power take-off


Mounting bolt (left-hand thread) (4)........................ M16x1.5x45-8.8 LH.......................Initial torque 100 Nm
Mounting bolt (left-hand thread) (4)........................ M16x1.5x45-8.8 LH..............................Final torque 90°

Removing and installing the belt drive (variant without Grosskopf alternator or hydraulic pump)
Poly-V-belt tensioner mounting bolt for alternator
(9) ....................................................................... M10x70-10.9......................................................47 Nm
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M10x70-10.9......................................................47 Nm
Mounting bolt, guide roller (7) ................................ M12x80-10.9......................................................60 Nm

Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator belt drive


Mounting bolt, pressure spring (2) ......................... M10x45-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolt, pressure spring (2) ......................... M12x40-10.9....................................................120 Nm

Removing and installing the hydraulic pump belt drive


Tensioning force on V-belt (4) when newly mounted ..........................................................................500 N
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) after running for longer than 10 min......................................................350 N

Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with one guide roller)
Mounting bolt, guide roller (1) ................................ M 12x80-10.9.....................................................60 Nm
Length, poly-V-belt (3) ................................................................................................................1366 mm
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3)........................................................................................... 75 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3).........................................................................................121 N

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 443


TECHNICAL DATA

Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3)............... Running time 15 minutes ...................................... 54 N


Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (3).............. Running time 15 minutes .....................................102 N

Removing and installing the Stretchybelt belt drive (variant with two guide rollers)
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M10x100-10.9....................................................47 Nm
Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M12x80-10.9......................................................60 Nm
Length, poly-V-belt (4) ................................................................................................................1418 mm
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4)........................................................................................... 51 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4).......................................................................................... 87 N
Minimum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4)............... Running time 15 minutes ...................................... 39 N
Maximum tensioning force, poly-V-belt (4).............. Running time 15 minutes ...................................... 75 N

Checking and setting the refrigerant compressor belt track (D0836 LFL50 to LFL55)
Angular offset, poly-V-belt pulley (4) to (6)................................................................................... Max. 0.5°
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M10x35-8.8 .......................................................45 Nm

Removing and installing the alternator


Mounting nut, poly-V-belt pulley (3)........................ M16x1.5 ............................................................80 Nm
Mounting nut, terminal B + .................................... M8 ....................................................................15 Nm
Hollow screw, coolant line ..................................... M14x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm
Union nut, coolant line .......................................... M14x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm

Removing and installing the Grosskopf alternator


Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x30-10.9 .......................................................30 Nm
Mounting bolt (5) .................................................. M10x25-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M10x25-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolt (12) ................................................ M10x35-10.9......................................................65 Nm
Mounting bolts (11) and (13).................................. M10x30-10.9......................................................65 Nm

Removing and installing the starter


Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M10x35-10.9......................................................45 Nm
Mounting nut (4) ................................................... M10...................................................................45 Nm
Starter, terminal B+............................................... M10x1.5 ............................................................22 Nm
Number of teeth, starter (2) ...................................................................................................................12
Nominal output, starter (2).................................................................................................. 5.0 kW at 24 V

Removing and installing the hydraulic pump


Mounting nut (6) ................................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................70 Nm
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) when newly mounted ..........................................................................500 N
Tensioning force on V-belt (4) after running for longer than 10 min......................................................350 N

Removing and installing the injectors and rail


Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x45 ............................................. Initial torque 2 Nm
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x45 ............................................ Final torque 30 Nm
Pressure screw (9) ............................................... M22x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
Pressure screw (9) ............................................... M22x1.5 ......................................... Final torque 55 Nm
Injector cable mounting nuts.................................. Cable lug nut M4...............................................1.5 Nm
High-pressure line (6) ........................................... M14x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (6) (initial use) .......................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (6) (re-use)............................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
High-pressure line (6) ........................................... M18x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (6) (initial use) .......................... M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (6) (reuse)................................ M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
Rail-pressure sensor (7)........................................ M18x1.5 ............................................................70 Nm
Pressure limiting valve .......................................... M18x1.5 ..........................................................100 Nm
Overow valve ..................................................... M14x1.5 ............................................................32 Nm

Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3)


Fuel ll quantity for high-pressure pump (4)....................................................................................... 60 ml
Filler plug for high-pressure pump (4) ..............................................................................................18 Nm
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x40-8.8 .........................................................30 Nm
Mounting nut (2) ................................................... M8 ....................................................................30 Nm

444 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TECHNICAL DATA

High-pressure line (1) ........................................... M14x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm


High-pressure line (initial use) (1) .......................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (re-use) (1)............................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°

Dismantling and assembling the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3)


Fuel ll quantity for high-pressure pump (4)....................................................................................... 60 ml
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M5x20 ............................................. Initial torque 4 Nm
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M5x20 ..............................................Final torque 7 Nm
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M6x1.5x36.......................................................... 8 Nm
Filler plug for high-pressure pump (4) ..............................................................................................18 Nm
Mounting nut (1) ................................................... M18x1.5-8.8 ....................................................105 Nm

Removing and installing the high-pressure pump (variant CP3.3 NH)


Fuel ll quantity, high-pressure pump (4)........................................................................................... 60 ml
Mounting bolt (3) .................................................. M8x40-8.8 .........................................................30 Nm
Mounting nut (2) ................................................... M8-8 .................................................................30 Nm
High-pressure line (1) ........................................... M14x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (initial use) (1) .......................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (re-use) (1)............................... M14x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
High-pressure line (1) ........................................... M18x1.5 ........................................ Initial torque 10 Nm
High-pressure line (initial use) (1) .......................... M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 60°
High-pressure line (re-use) (1)............................... M18x1.5 ..............................................Final torque 30°
Mounting nut, drive gear, high-pressure pump (4)... M18x1.5-8.8 ....................................................105 Nm
Filler plug, high-pressure pump (4) ..................................................................................................18 Nm

Dismantling and assembling the fuel service centre


Pressure sensor (5) .............................................. M18x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm
Cover (11) ......................................................................................................................................10 Nm
Cover (2)........................................................................................................................................20 Nm
Water drain plug (6) ......................................................................................................................... 3 Nm

Removing and installing the ame start system


Mounting nut, cable lug......................................... M5 ..................................................................... 5 Nm
Flame glow plug (1) .............................................. M20x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Union nuts, fuel line (3) ......................................... M10x1 ...............................................................10 Nm

Removing and installing the engine control unit


Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M6x35-10.9 ....................................................... 11 Nm
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-10.9 .......................................................13 Nm

Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging without intercooler)
Clamp for charge-air manifold (2) ..................................................................................................... 7 Nm
Exhaust manifold clamp ................................................................................................................... 7 Nm

Removing and installing the turbocharger (variant with two-stage charging with intercooler)
Clamp (4)............................................................. M6x50 ................................................................ 7 Nm
Clamps, charge-air manifold.................................. M6x50 ................................................................ 6 Nm

Removing and installing the air distributor pipe


Temperature sensor (2)......................................... M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm

Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 4 variant)


Temperature sensor, EGR module (6).................... M16x1.5 ............................................................45 Nm
Mounting nut, EGR positioning cylinder (4) ............ M8 ....................................................................16 Nm
Preload, EGR positioning cylinder (4) ................................................................................ 1.25 ± 0.25 mm

Removing and installing the EGR module (Euro 5 and EEV variant)
Mounting bolts, shut-off valve (4) ........................... M8x80 ...............................................................27 Nm
Mounting bolts, shut-off valve (4) ........................... M8x18 ...............................................................27 Nm
Temperature sensor, EGR module (6).................... M16x1.5 ...................................................47 Nm, oiled
Bulkhead tting..................................................... M15x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm
Preload, EGR positioning cylinder (3) .......................................................................................1 + 0.5 mm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 445


TECHNICAL DATA

Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 4 variant)


Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M8x40-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M8x40-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M8x40-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (9) .................................................. M8x40-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolts, shut-off valve ................................ M8x80-GA .........................................................27 Nm

Removing and installing the exhaust manifold (Euro 5 and EEV variant)
Mounting bolt (7), (12) .......................................... M8x40-GA ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (7), (12) .......................................... M8x40-GA ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (7), (12) .......................................... M8x40-GA ...........................................Final torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-SD ..................................... Initial torque 25 Nm
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-SD ............................................ 2nd torque 45°
Mounting bolt (8) .................................................. M8x80-SD ...........................................Final torque 45°

Dismantling and assembling the rocker arm mechanism


Inside diameter, rocker arms (1), (7), (8), (12) ............................................................. 28.000 - 28.021 mm
Outside diameter, rocker arm shaft (13) ...................................................................... 27.957 - 27.970 mm
Inside diameter, rocker arm bracket (14) ..................................................................... 27.985 - 28.006 mm

Removing and installing the cylinder head


Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)..................................... Initial torque 80 Nm
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)......................................2nd torque 150 Nm
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)............................................. 3rd torque 90°
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)............................................. 4th torque 90°
Cylinder head bolts............................................... 14x2 (E18)...........................................Final torque 90°

Checking and setting the valve clearance


Lock nuts, adjusting screws (3), (4), (5).................. M10x1-8.8 .........................................................40 Nm
Intake valve clearance ................................................................................................................ 0.50 mm
Exhaust valve clearance ............................................................................................................. 0.50 mm
EVB brace adjustment dimension ................................................................................................ 0.35 mm

Removing and installing the timing gears


Mounting bolts, camshaft gear (5).......................... M10x1.25x38-10.9 .............................................65 Nm
Mounting nut, oil pump drive gear (2)..................... M12x1.5-6S .......................................................45 Nm

Removing and installing the timing gears


Radial play, intermediate gear 1 ..................................................................................... 0.060 - 0.109 mm
Axial play, intermediate gear 1........................................................................................ 0.200 - 0.280 mm
Radial play, intermediate gear 2 (1) ................................................................................ 0.035 - 0.076 mm
Axial play, intermediate gear 2 (1)................................................................................... 0.100 - 0.200 mm

Removing and installing the timing gears


Crankshaft gear (4) - camshaft gear (5) .......................................................................... 0.051 - 0.149 mm
Camshaft gear (5) - air compressor gear......................................................................... 0.051 - 0.185 mm
Crankshaft gear (4) - intermediate gear 1........................................................................ 0.050 - 0.187 mm
Intermediate gear 1 - intermediate gear 2 (1) .................................................................. 0.051 - 0.175 mm
Intermediate gear 1 - oil pump drive gear (2) ................................................................... 0.053 - 0.190 mm

Removing and installing the oil module


Oil lter cover .................................................................................................................................25 Nm
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M6x20 ...............................................................12 Nm
Pressure transmitter (3) ........................................ M18x1.5 ............................................................47 Nm
Screw-in tting (5) ................................................ M30x1.5 ............................................................60 Nm
Screw plug (8) ...................................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................42 Nm

446 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TECHNICAL DATA

Removing and installing the oil sump and oil intake pipe (Euro 4 variant)
Oil level sensor..................................................... M18x1.5 ............................................................25 Nm
Oil drain plug........................................................ M22x1.5-5.8 ......................................................75 Nm

Removing and installing the oil sump upper section (Euro 5 and EEV variant)
Oil level sensor..................................................... M18...................................................................45 Nm

Removing and installing the oil pump


Oil pump gear axial play................................................................................................. 0.050 - 0.114 mm
Radial play, oil pump shaft ............................................................................................. 0.050 - 0.078 mm

Removing and installing the oil injector nozzles


Oil pressure valve (3)............................................ M12...................................................................40 Nm

Removing and installing the vibration damper


Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M14x1.5x95-10.9 ..........................Initial torque 150 Nm
Mounting bolt (1) .................................................. M14x1.5x95-10.9 .................................Final torque 90°

Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox


Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x30-10.9 ..........................Initial torque 100 Nm
Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x30-10.9 .................................Final torque 90°
Lateral runout, ywheel (1)....................................................................................................Max. 0.5 mm
Flywheel ring gear installation temperature .............................................................................220 - 240 °C

Removing and installing the ywheel for manual gearbox


Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x87-10.9 ..........................Initial torque 100 Nm
Mounting bolt (2) .................................................. M14x1.5x87-10.9 .................................Final torque 90°
Lateral runout, ywheel (1)....................................................................................................Max. 0.5 mm
Flywheel ring gear installation temperature .............................................................................220 - 240 °C

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Connecting rod bearing bolt (1) ............................. M11x1.5x60-11.9............................ Initial torque 55 Nm
Connecting rod bearing bolt (1) ............................. M11x1.5x60-11.9..................................Final torque 90°

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Connecting rod length, piston pin bushing centre - connecting rod bearing centre ................. 196 ± 0.02 mm
Inside diameter, connecting rod eye......................................................................... Ø 44.050 - 44.066 mm
Hole for bearing shells in connecting rod (connecting rod big end)............................. Ø 74.000 - 74.019 mm
Weight difference per set of connecting rods in an engine........................................................... Max. 50 g

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Connecting rod bearing........................................................................................... Ø 69.981 - 70.000 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Connecting rod bearing shell thickness .................. Normal ............................................. 1.975 - 1.987 mm
Connecting rod bearing shell thickness .................. Normal size 1.................................... 2.025 - 2.037 mm
Connecting rod bearing shell thickness .................. Repair level 1.................................... 2.100 - 2.112 mm
Connecting rod bearing shell spread......................................................................................Max. 1.5 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.851 - 107.860 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.726 - 107.735 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above piston bottom edge....................................................107.573 - 107.564 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.866 - 107.875 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.115) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.277) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.875 - 107.884 mm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 447


TECHNICAL DATA

D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.115) ± 0.007 mm


D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.277) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.851 - 107.860 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.125) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.287) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.860 - 107.869 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.125) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.9 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.287) ± 0.012 mm
D4 measured 96.7 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 1.700) ± 0.012 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 13 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.851 - 107.860 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.150) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.4 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.328) ± 0.010 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


D1 measured 17 mm above lower edge of piston .....................................................107.860 - 107.869 mm
D2 measured 59 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................... (DNeff - 0.150) ± 0.007 mm
D3 measured 84.4 mm above lower edge of piston ............................................ (DNeff - 0.328) ± 0.010 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Overall height..........................................................................................................................103.00 mm
Piston height (centre of piston pin - piston crown)............................................................ 63.85 - 63.90 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Piston ring height..................................................................................................... 3 mm (nominal value)
Piston ring width ................................................................................................................ 4.25 - 4.60 mm
Ring gap ........................................................................................................................... 0.35 - 0.50 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Piston ring height............................................................................................................... 2.47 - 2.50 mm
Piston ring width ................................................................................................................ 4.20 - 4.60 mm
Ring gap ........................................................................................................................... 0.50 - 0.65 mm
Axial play .......................................................................................................................... 0.06 - 0.11 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Piston ring height............................................................................................................... 2.97 - 2.99 mm
Piston ring width ................................................................................................................ 3.40 - 3.65 mm
Ring gap ........................................................................................................................... 0.30 - 0.60 mm
Axial play, KS piston .......................................................................................................... 0.05 - 0.09 mm
Axial play, Nüral piston....................................................................................................... 0.03 - 0.07 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Piston pin diameter................................................................................................. Ø 43.994 - 44.000 mm
Radial play in connecting rod ......................................................................................... 0.050 - 0.072 mm
Radial play in piston ...................................................................................................... 0.006 - 0.021 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Piston standout (crankcase - piston) ............................................................................... 0.087 - 0.389 mm

Removing and installing the pistons and connecting rods


Piston weight difference per set in one engine............................................................................ Max. 40 g

Removing and installing the crankshaft


Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M14x118-10.9 ...............................Initial torque 115 Nm
Mounting bolt (4) .................................................. M14x118-10.9 ......................................Final torque 90°

448 A25 Stage 2 3rd edition


TECHNICAL DATA

Removing and installing the crankshaft


Hardness, crankshaft (6)......................................................................................................... 53 ± 3 HRC
Permitted curvature of journals...................................................................................................0.004 mm
Axial play, crankshaft (6) ................................................................................................ 0.200 - 0.395 mm
Connecting rod bearing journal................................................................................ Ø 69.981 - 70.000 mm
Crankshaft bearing journal ...................................................................................... Ø 86.981 - 87.000 mm

Removing and installing the crankshaft


Crankshaft bearing inside diameter ......................................................................... Ø 89.520 - 89.554 mm
Wall thickness of crankshaft bearing shells (1), (2) .......................................................... 2.468 - 2.480 mm
Wall thickness, thrust washers (5), (7) ............................................................................ 2.850 - 2.900 mm
Crankshaft bearing spread ....................................................................................................Max. 1.5 mm

Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL50/53)


Oil return line (4)................................................... M24x1.5 ............................................................. 4 Nm

Removing and installing the crankcase ventilation (variant LFL51/52/54/55)


Oil return line (4)................................................... M24x1.5 ............................................................. 4 Nm

Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant without power take-off)
Mounting bolt (5) .................................................. M14x105-10.9..................................................170 Nm
Mounting bolt (6) .................................................. M12x30-10.9....................................................105 Nm

Removing and installing the ywheel housing (variant with power take-off 600 Nm)
Speed sensor, crankshaft...................................... M6x16-10.9 ........................................................ 8 Nm

Removing and installing the timing case cover


Oil ller neck (3) ................................................... M38x1.5 ............................................................35 Nm

A25 Stage 2 3rd edition 449

You might also like